NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY


FORMED 2nd November 1937

Friday 29th October 1937  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
MEETING ON TUESDAY
A move to form a Photographic Society in Newcastle will be made next Tuesday night, when a meeting of photographers will be held in the Adult Deaf and Dumb Building, Newcomen Street, at 8pm.

The meeting is being called by Mr. G. Garside, of Newcastle, following repeated requests for the formation of a society.

"It is time that a society of this kind was introduced in the district", said Mr. Garside to-day. "Anyone keenly interested is welcome to attend the meeting".

He added that the object of the society would be to develop photography to the common interest of amateurs by competition in outdoor and indoor work and by general instruction.



Saturday 30th October 1937  Page 8 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)
Wednesday 3rd November 1937  Page 2 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
A meeting of photographers will be held at the Adult Deaf and Dumb building, Newcastle, on Tuesday night to form a photographic society. The object of the society will be to develop photography to the common interest of amateurs by competition and general instruction.



Wednesday 3rd November 1937  Page 2 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY - MEETING ON TUESDAY
A move to form a Photographic Society in Newcastle will be made next Tuesday night, when a meeting of photographers will be held in the Adult Deaf and Dumb Building, Newcomen Street, at 8pm.

The meeting is being called by Mr. G. Garside, of Newcastle, following repeated requests for the formation of a society.

"It is time that a society of this kind was introduced in the district", said Mr. Garside to-day. "Anyone keenly interested is welcome to attend the meeting".

He added that the object of the society would be to develop photography to the common interest of amateurs by competition in outdoor and indoor work and by general instruction.



Wednesday 3rd November 1937  Page 2 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY WAS FORMED
With its main object to raise the standard of amateur photography the Newcastle Photographic Society was formed at a meeting on Tuesday 2nd November 1937. The meeting was held in the rooms of the Deaf and Dumb Society and was well attended by professional and amateur photographers from all parts of the district. All expressed optimism as to the possibilities of such a society in Newcastle. There had been an increase in the standard of photographic work in recent years, it was stated and even greater improvement would result from the formation of the Society. The meeting adopted a constitution in which special provision is made for members between the ages of 14 and 18. The objects of the Society include raising the standard of photography by means of demonstrations, competitions, lectures and exchange of prints with rooms for lectures and other work, building up a library and securing of essential equipment.

The following officers were elected: Chairman, Mr. C.H. Shipway; vice chairman, Mr. C.P. Hughes; Hon.Treasurer, Mr. J.H. Houghton; Hon.Secretary, Mr. G. Garside; committee, Messrs. E.C. Sara, R.S. Douglas and C.R. Hardy.



Wednesday 3rd November 1937  Page 2 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)
Tuesday 16th November 1937  Page 7 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

The first meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society following its inauguration recently, will be held in the Howard Harris studios, Morgan-street, to-night. Meetings will be held every fortnight. Intending members are requested to communicate with the Hon.Secretary, Mr. Garside.



Thursday 2nd December 1937  Page 8 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

At a meeting of the recently formed Newcastle Photographic Society, an address on pictorial composition was delivered by Mr. E.C. Sara. He said that in considering the theory of photography they had two separate though not entirely independent points of view; that which deals with practical requirements, the technique of development and printing and that which regards the question of design and considers the effect of the finished photograph in giving aesthetic satisfaction. They could learn a good deal about design by studying and trying to analyze the work of well known artists and first-class photographers in the sphere of landscape and in portraiture and commercial work. The principles to be observed were unity, composition of masses, contrast, action and direction, viewpoint, depth and distance.



Thursday 16th December 1937  Page 8 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

The fortnightly meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society was very well attended. Mr. Wilkinson (Howard Harris's studio) gave a very interesting and instructive lecture on lighting. This was accompanied by a practical demonstration. The next meeting of the society will be held on January 18. Intending members should write to the Hon.Secretary, Mr. G. Garside.



Saturday 22nd January 1938  Page 6 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

At the first meeting in 1938 of the Newcastle Photographic Society, held on Tuesday, the President (Mr. C.H. Shipway) gave an interesting lecture on "Developing". Members had many doubtful points cleared up and benefited by the lecture. The next meeting will be held on 1st February and intending members will be welcome, The Hon.Secretary is Mr. Garside, of Harrington's.



Tuesday 1st March 1938  Page 9 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA ART EXHIBITION
An exhibition of miniature camera art is to be held in Newcastle from 14th to 19th March. The City Council last night agreed to make available the ground floor hall of the Town Hall for the exhibition. The exhibition will include 116 enlargements of miniature negatives. The collection comprises the work of photographers in England, Germany, Italy and America. The exhibition is being arranged by Newcastle Photographic Society.



Saturday 12th March 1938  Page 10 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

ART IN MINIATURE
Exhibition by Photographic Society
STUDIES FROM OVERSEAS
A step forward in its efforts to stimulate interest in skilled photography in Newcastle district will be made by the Newcastle Photographic Society next week, when it will present an oversea photographic exhibition of miniature camera art at the Newcastle Town Hall.The exhibition, comprising 116 studies by Continental and American experts, was shown in Sydney recently. It was the first exhibition of its kind in Australia.

The President of the Newcastle Rotary Club (Mr. H.D. Hill) will open the exhibition on Tuesday night. Afternoon and evening sessions will be held from Monday to Friday. Highlights of the display will be special sections by two well known photographers, Dr. Paul Wolff and A.F. Baumann. Studies by Alfred Person will demonstrate this man's own process of miniature photography. This branch of picture making is rapidly gaining favor. The studies display, including portraiture, landscapes, seascapes and still life, are of a uniform size of nearly 2ft. by 18in., having been enlarged from negatives scarcely bigger than a postage stamp.

The object of the society, which is directing the exhibition by courtesy of Mr. Hermann Junge, is to contribute, in its own way, to the cultural development of the district. The society, which was formed last November, has more than 40 members and holds regular competitions in which points are awarded for pictorial composition and technical skill. The society hopes shortly to establish its own quarters and equip them with complete photographic plant.

The officials organizing the exhibition next week are the President (Mr. C.H. Shipway), Secretary (Mr. G. Garside), Treasurer (Mr. J.H. Houghton) and Messrs. E.C. Sara, R.C. Hardy and Dr. R.S. Douglas, of the society's council.



Wednesday 16th March 1938  Page 4 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

THE CANDID CAMERA
EXHIBITION OF PHOTOGRAPHS
FIRST OF KIND IN AUSTRALIA
"It's by far the best I have ever seen", said a prominent Newcastle professional photographer in praise of the Overseas Photographic Exhibition of Miniature Camera Art, as he strolled through Newcastle Town Hall yesterday.

Bending his critical and expert gaze upon the cleverly arranged exhibits, he picked out one for special commendation "Shipwreck", by the well-known German, Herr von Perkhamnmer. Others in the throng, enthusiastic amateurs, were obviously pleased by the variety and quality of the exhibition, which is under the direction of Newcastle Photographic Society, by courtesy of Mr. Hermann Junge.

The exhibition was opened officially last night by the President of the Newcastle Rotary Club (Mr. H.D. Hill), who said that he was pleased that he had been asked to open an international exhibition which aimed at bringing together different sections of the local community. He congratulated the Newcastle Photographic Society on its initiative in having the photographs brought from Sydney, where lovers of pictorial art had thronged the exhibition. The President of the society (Mr. C.H. Shipway), Mr. Hermann Junge, Mr. Walter Stolting and Mr. E.C. Sara also spoke.

Many encomiums and diatribes have been penned in attempts to prove or disprove the claim that Newcastle is an art-minded city. All those pros and cons have long since been exhausted. The proof of the pudding, however, is in the eating. Here is an excellent exhibition - the first of its kind to be held in Australia. It is free, it is open to adults and children. Newcastle, by its patronage of concerts, has proved that it has ears with which to hear; it can now show that it has eyes with which to see.

ADMIRABLE ARRANGEMENT
The photographs, enlarged from postage stamp size to about 2ft. by 18in., are mostly the work of Germans, among whom Dr. Paul Wolff, of Frankfort-on-the-Main and Herr Anton Baumann, are conspicuous by the variety and technique of their exhibits.

The officials responsible for the arrangement of the photographs have succeeded admirably in showing them to the best advantage. There is ample room for visitors and no neck-craning is necessary. As far as possible, the exhibits have been grouped according to their subjects: portraits, seascapes, architecture and landscapes.

Dr. Wolff, who is ranked very high among German photographers, is represented by a small but select choice from his works. In general, he excels as a photographer of nature. Rarely however, does he depend on nature alone for the artistic effects he achieves. In most of his work emphasis is placed on a group of persons or a central dominating theme cleverly harmonized with a natural background that enhances the appeal.

Dr. Wolff is a master of photographic technique. None of his photographs is ordinary. In each there is proof of his aptitude for composition, which is most rhythmic. In his "In the Dunes", a view of three young women in bathing dress holding hands on a sandy knoll he has achieved his effect by arranging his subjects in dynamic rhythmic progression. Tonal effect is provided by the different colors of the girls costumes - black, white and yellow.

Pictures of a yachtsman and a man in a speed boat are raised above the general level of the amateur by the use of triangular effects in the arrangement of the central masses. Lake Macquarie would provide ample opportunities for local photographers to emulate Dr. Wolff in such subjects.

"The Cabby", a night photograph of a taximan sitting on the box on his horse-drawn cab, is a good example of Dr. Woolf's skill in taking close-ups of people. There is nothing to distract the eye, which focusses naturally upon the white masses of the man's lined face and the lamp of his old cab. All else is dark, though not sombre enough to obscure the texture of his heavy overcoat. As in a typical Rembrandt, oil, the dark central figure, shades imperceptibly into a darker background. The naturalness of the poise and deep feeling of the photographer are most apparent.

TRIP TO U.S.A.
Herr Baumann's enlargements are mostly of photographs taken during a tour of the United States. Traveling with his camera, a sharp pair of discerning eyes and a bulky wallet, he has captured the beauty of the modern skyscraper and America's diversified scenery. Whereas Dr. Woolf is interested in people chiefly as incidents in sympathetic studies of Nature, Herr Baumann has in him something of the "genre" artist. He concentrates on people as people - in bars, in breweries and elsewhere. He has one exhibit of a woman salving her lips in public. Like Jan Steen and many of his Dutch contemporaries, he is interested in the various facets of human nature.

It is only natural, therefore that there are many portraits from his camera. They include Navajo Indians, American farmers and a negress. Perhaps the most outstanding is that of the farmer from the Eastern United States.

Herr Baumann is nothing if not versatile. Though intrigued with the quick, he does not forget the inanimate. Russian influence is apparent in his artistic reaction to the sheer, clean, towering lines of the Radio City skyscraper in New York City. Crouching like an ant at the base of the huge central column, he has managed to focus a statue in the foreground and still get sharpness in the silhouette of the topmost sky-scraping storey.

More German in technique is a photograph of the needle like skyscrapers of down town New York, seen clearly through an intricate network of cables on one of the East River bridges. And romantically orthodox is an aerial view of the city nearly obscured by a ground haze, while the gigantic tower of the Empire State Building points majestically to the zenith like a Gulliver among the architectural Lilliputians that grovel beneath. Such a photograph might have been taken from the tower of Notre Dame, Paris, or the dome of St. Paul's, London. Eacg city has the same appeal to the romantic mind; river haze and the mental elevation that comes from looking down on a city from a great height.

When he could get nothing more exalted than a skyscraper, Herr Baumann went modern and boarded aeroplanes. Skimming over the States, he got some excellent scenic views with his bird's-eye-view miniature camera. Enlarged, they are now being enjoyed by the Newcastle public. The traveler ranged from the Grand Canyon of the Colorado to the Niagara Falls on the Canadian border. It is probable that he ran some risk in getting his snaps. Sir Alan Cobham, for instance, nearly crashed into the Victoria Falls when either an air current or moisture from the falls affected his machine.

Some of Herr Baumann's photographs are influenced strongly by the modern trend towards pictorial advertising. They are less satisfying aesthetically than his nature studies, but interesting as examples of how pictures can sell a commodity more effectually than long reams of verbose publicity.



Friday 25th March 1938  Page 5 - Dungog Chronicle : Durham and Gloucester Advertiser (NSW)

1938 DUNGOG SHOW - EXTRA EXHIBITS
Two marvellous pieces of workmanship were shown by Mr. T. Coote of Dungog as extra exhibits. They were beautifully inlaid and polished work boxes. Each one contained several hundred pieces of wood and not in one of the joins was there sufficient space for a pin point. Mr. Coote is well over 80 years of age and this wonderful work he has done since the occasion of his 80th birthday. The timbers used include silky oak, black ebony, cedar, walnut and hewn pine. Another extra exhibit was shown by the Newcastle Photographic Society, being photographs of numerous scenes, mainly rural. They all were interesting.



Thursday 4th August 1938  Page 7 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

A short lecture on pictorial construction was given at a meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society at Howard Harris studio on Tuesday night. Enlargements by members were criticized for pictorial effects and analyzed for technical errors. Photographic magazines were discussed. Intending members should communicate with Mr. G. Garside, 124 Hunter street, Newcastle.



Saturday 6th August 1938  Page 3 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
A lecture on pictorial construction was given at the last meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society. Enlargements by members were criticized for pictorial effects and analyzed for technical errors.

The Hon.Secretary of the Society is Mr. G. Garside.



Saturday 12th August 1938  Page 10 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

ART IN MINIATURE
EXHIBITION BY PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
STUDIES FROM OVERSEAS
A step forward in its efforts to stimulate interest in skilled photography in Newcastle district will be made by the Newcastle Photographic Society next week, when it will present an oversea photographic exhibition of miniature camera art at the Newcastle Town Hall. The exhibition, comprising 116 studies by Continental and American experts, was shown in Sydney recently. It was the first exhibition of its kind in Australia.

The President of the Newcastle Rotary Club (Mr. H.D. Hill) will open the exhibition on Tuesday night. Afternoon and evening sessions will be held from Monday to Friday. Highlights of the display will be special sections by two well known photographers, Dr. Paul Wolff and A.F. Baumann. Studies by Alfred Person will demonstrate this man's own process of miniature photography. This branch of picture making is rapidly gaining favor. The studies display, including portraiture, landscapes, seascapes and still life, are of a uniform size of nearly 2ft. by 18in., having been enlarged from negatives scarcely bigger than a postage stamp.

The object of the society, which is directing the exhibition by courtesy of Mr. Hermann Junge, is to contribute, in its own way, to the cultural development of the district. The society, which was formed last November, has more than 40 members and holds regular competitions in which points are awarded for pictorial composition and technical skill. The society hopes shortly to establish its own quarters and equip them with complete photographic plant.

The officials organizing the exhibition next week are the President (Mr. C.H. Shipway), Hon.Secretary (Mr. G. Garside), Treasurer (Mr. J.H. Houghton) and Messrs. E.C. Sara, R.C. Hardy and Dr. R.S. Douglas, of the society's council.



Saturday 13th August 1938  Page 2 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

Much business of interest to members and to photographers generally, will come before Newcastle Photographic Society at its meeting on Tuesday night. The society will meet at the Howard Harris Studio at 8pm. The first portion of the meeting will be devoted to criticism of prints and this will be followed by talks on pictorial construction by Messrs. Shipway and E.C. Sara, technical criticism by Mr. Wilkinson and filters and their uses by Messrs. Shipway, Hughes, Hardy and E.C. Sara. The competition portraiture closes on Tuesday and members are urged to make a special effort with this. The judge will be Mr. Wilkinson and his comments should be very helpful. Information concerning the Newcastle Photographic Society's activities may be had from the Hon.Secretary (Mr. G. Garside) at Kodak Australasia) Pty. Ltd., Hunter-street, Newcastle.



Saturday 27th August 1938  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
Important business will come before the Newcastle Photographic Society at its fortnightly meeting next Tuesday, August 30. The society meets in Howard Harris's studio at 8pm. An informative talk on filters and their uses will be given by Mr. Wilkinson and the rest of the night will be occupied in print criticism and a commentary on the results of the portraiture competition. The Hon.Secretary (Mr. G. Garside) will welcome any inquiries from intending members who care to visit him at Kodak, Hunter-street, Newcastle.



Saturday 3rd September 1938  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
So high was the standard of the work submitted that the Judge (Mr. A.H. Wilkinson) had some difficulty in awarding the points to the Newcastle Photographic Society's portraiture competition, which was run in two divisions.

In the A grade, Mr. E.C. Sara was the winner, with Mr. C.H. Shipway second, Mr. G. Garside third and Mr. C.R. Hardy fourth. The B grade went to Mr. C.W. Burgess, with Messrs. C. Fraser runner-up and D. Cameron and E.J. Billings dead-heating for third.

Present plans of the society provide that the first half-hour of each meeting night be devoted to criticism of members prints for their pictorial worth. The criticism is intentionally severe, the object being to assist members to produce work which can be sent overseas for exhibition, to compete with the world's best.

This week's talk to the Newcastle Photographic Society was given by Mr. Wilkinson, who spoke on the use of filters and gave a practical demonstration with the aid of a spectoscope using yellow, red and green lights. It was an interesting experience for those who attended, demonstrating as it did the actual work performed by the various filters.



Saturday 22nd October 1938  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The Newcastle Photographic Society is within a few weeks of celebrating its first anniversary and it may do so with a feeling of pride in the fine work it has accomplished — work done on the right lines.

The society was formed on 2nd November 1937, with the object of bringing together those associated with photography, to have club rooms, a dark room and a library for the use of members and it elected the following officers: President, Mr. C.H. Shipway; Vice-president, Mr. C.P. Hughes; Treasurer, Mr. J.H. Houghton; Hon.Secretary, Mr. G. Garside. These officers, with Dr. R.S. Douglas and Messrs. E.C. Sara and C.R. Hardy, constitute the council of the society.

During the year lectures were given on all phases of photography and recent meetings have been occupied by print criticisms, followed by a short lecture on some interesting topic such as filters, exposure meters, technical criticism and mounting.

Monthly competitions were conducted, the subjects including spring and marine, landscape, still life, architecture, industry, interiors, exteriors, artificial light, trees, animals and open subjects.



Saturday 19th November 1938  Page 3 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
Talks on how to photograph trees to obtain the best results will be given by Messrs. Shipway and Wilkinson at the Newcastle Photographic Society's regular fortnightly meeting on Tuesday next, 22nd November. The meeting is at Howard Harris's studio at 8pm. Print criticism and short talks on mounting and presentation of exhibition prints will be given by Messrs. Shipway, Wilkinson, Garside and Hardy. The November competition has been cancelled and the President's competition. "Trees", has taken its place. The closing date will be announced at the meeting. The yachting competition closes on Tuesday and the Hon.Secretary (Mr. G. Garside) asks members to take along their entries.

THE NEWCASTLE SUN c.1930's

Saturday 26th November 1938  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The Newcastle Photographic Society outing to Lake Macquarie recently was productive of many excellent action pictures of yachts. The competition was judged by popular vote this week, first points going to Mr. C. Shipway, with Mr. H.W. Hall runner-up and Mr. C.P. Hughes third. At this week's meeting, two short talks were given by Messrs. C. Shipway and A.H. Wilkinson, on how to photograph trees, illustrated by the use of the epiadioscope. This was the forerunner of an outing on 4th December, at which there will be a competition — the final of the year — in connection with the President's special competition.



Saturday 3rd December 1938  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

The Newcastle Photographic Society's next meeting will be held on Tuesday 13th December, in the Howard Harris studio at 8pm, when print criticism and the competition prints received from Sydney will be dealt with. The competition, "Gum Trees", closes on Tuesday 13th December and to assist members in entering, it has been decided to hold on outing at Swansea tomorrow. Members will leave Newcastle at 10.18am, or Broadmeadow at 10.30am, by bus. Members desiring any information are asked to get in touch immediately with the Hon.Secretary (Mr. G. Garside).

ON PLEASURE BENT
This action picture taken by Mr. C. Shipway at the last outing of
Newcastle Photographic Society
on Lake Macquarie, was, by popular vote awarded first prize in the society's,
"Yachts" competition. It was taken on 1/100sec. at f/6.3, using
Kodak Panatomic film, about 3.30 p.m. The day was very dull and flat.

Saturday 17th December 1938  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

PRIZE-WINNING PRINT

This study in still life,
POTTERY
Mr. C.H. SHIPWAY
gained first prize in the
Newcastle Photographic Society
recent competition.

Saturday 17th December 1938  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

The Newcastle Photographic Society held its final meeting for 1938 during the week and will now go into recess until 10th January.

The last four competition prints have been received from the Sydney Judges, who made the following awards:
STILL LIFE: C.H. Shipway 1, G. Garside 2, A.T. Ullman 3.
ARCHITECTURE: C.P. Hughes 1, E.C. Sara 2, A.T. Ullman 3.
INTERIORS: C.R. Hardy 1, E.C. Sara 2, D. Cameron 3.
EXTERIOR ARTIFICIAL LIGHT: A.T. Ullman 1, C.H. Shipway 2, D. Cameron 3.

A very helpful criticism on the prints was written by the Judges, who pointed out the faults and virtues of each, with hints of making improvements.

Here is a typical criticism on a print, "Tuscan Columns" — "Very nice subject, well chosen, composition good, mass on left being balanced by group of trees on right. Would be improved by accenting light areas on columns. Sky patches make print a little spotty and require lowering in tones. Tone quality and technique very good".

Remarks such as these are very valuable to the members in general and when attached to an individual print gives everyone a chance to follow the remarks thoroughly.

The Newcastle Photographic Society hopes to have a very successful year. In 1939 and would appreciate an increased membership. In the near future many different facilities will be available to the amateur.

On behalf of the Newcastle Photographic Society, the Hon.Secretary (Mr. G. Garside) has requested me, in this column, to wish all amateur photographers the compliments of the season, with the hope that they obtain plenty of good photographs during the coming year.



Saturday 31st December 1938  Page 3 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

PRIZE-WINNING PRINT

CITY LIGHTS
Mr. A.T. ULLMAN
gained first prize in
Newcastle Photographic Society
"Exterior Artificial Light" competition

Saturday 7th January 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

HOMELY TASKS

This pleasing and natural study won for
Mr. C.R. HARDY
the first prize in
Newcastle Photographic Society
"indoor artificial light" competition.

Saturday 7th January 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

The first meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society for 1939 will be held on Tuesday 17th January, at 8pm. The financial report for 1938 will be presented and officers elected for the coming 12 months. The first of the 1939 monthly competitions, "Open Subjects", closes on 31st January.



Saturday 14th January 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

TUSCAN COLUMNS

This study of the old Berrima Gaol
Mr. C.P. HUGHES
won the first prize in the
Newcastle Photographic Society
"Architecture" competition.

Saturday 14th January 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The annual meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society will be held In Howard Harris's studios on Tuesday 17th January. The financial report for 1938 will be presented and officers elected for the coming 12 months. An invitation to all amateurs desiring to Join the Society is issued by the Hon.Secretary (Mr. G. Garside). Members are reminded that the first of the 1939 monthly competitions, "Open Subjects", closes on 31st January.



Saturday 21st January 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

PHOTOGRAPHERS MEET

Some of the members of the Newcastle Photographic Society who attended the annual meeting during the week.
From left to right (at back): Messrs. A. TAYLOR and G.L. McPHERSON
Second row: Messrs. W. BEAL, J. HAWKINS, C. BURGESS, A. PERCIVAL, C. FRASER, A.T. ULLMAN. E.A. SINCLAIR.
Front row: Messrs. C.R. HARDY (Councillor), J.H. HOUGHTON (Hon.Treasurer), C.H. SHIPWAY (President),
G. GARSIDE (Hon.Secretary), E.C. SARA (Councillor).

Saturday 21st January 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

Expressing confidence in its 1938 officials, Newcastle Photographic Society this week, at its annual meeting, re-elected them ail for the coming year. The officers are: President, Mr. C.H. Shipway; Vice-President, Mr. C.P. Hughes; Treasurer, Mr. J.H. Houghton; Hon.Secretary, Mr. G. Garside; Committee, Messrs. C.R. Hardy and E.C. Sara.

In his annual report, the Hon.Secretary recalled that the society commenced on 2nd November 1937, with 32 members. Since then, resignations and new members joining have not affected the actual number of members. Since, the inauguration, there have been 28 general and 13 council meetings and four outings were held during the past 12 months,

A very successful exhibition of photographs from miniature negatives was held in the City Hall, where approximately 1000 people attended. The Society held 11 competitions during the year, eight of which have already been judged. The other three are "Trees", "Animals" and "Industry".

The thanks of the society were extended to Mr. Wilkinson for the use of his studio for meetings, Mr. E.C. Sara for the use of his rooms for council meetings, the various lecturers, demonstrators and Judges and to the "Newcastle Sun" for the very helpful publicity contained each week in its "Camera Craft" column.



Saturday 28th January 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

DIGNITY OF AGE
This entry by Mr. C.P. Hughes, won the
Newcastle Photographic Society
"Tree" competition.

Saturday 11th February 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The regular fortnightly meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society will be held on Tuesday 14th February, in Howard Harris's studios at 8pm. An interesting lecture on chemicals used in photography will be given by the president (Mr. C.H. Shipway). This month's competition, which closes on the 28th February, should prove interesting and give members an opportunity of displaying their initiative. It is a photograph depicting heat.



Saturday 18th February 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

This picture, by Mr. W. Beal of the
Newcastle Photographic Society
is a good example of light and shadow.
It was taken in daylight on 1/300th sec. at f8, using Agfa ISS film.

Wednesday 22nd February 1939  Page 13 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA ART AT SHOW - HIGH STANDARD DISPLAYED
Newcastle's amateur photographers have made a fine display at the Show and their efforts fully justify the remarks of the judge (Mr. R.D. Hansen) that they are well in line with the most advanced ideas of modern photography.

There are more entries this year than previously and this demonstrates the great interest and enthusiasm which has been noticeable among amateur photographers in the Newcastle district, particularly in the past 12 months. Newcastle Photographic Society is well represented and the quality of the whole of the work is outstanding. Commenting on the display generally, Mr. Hansen said that the photographs showed a splendid sense of the dramatic and there was distinct evidence of the angle complex. There were many fine examples of photography exhibited.

The most popular section was that for mounted enlargements of any subjects by amateurs, although all the other sections were well supported. Not much attention was paid to the class calling for six or more photographs of any size. One of the most popular classes was that of tree subjects and here the Newcastle Tree Planting and Preservation League cooperated with the Show Association by donating the prize money. The trees had to illustrate pictorial value, particularly in relation to streets, highways or parks. The pictorial standpoint here was the basis of the Judging, all things being equal. Incidentally, the Tree League had a non-competitive exhibition of tree photographs, noticeable among which was the tree at Jesmond, which caused a storm at a recent Greater City Council meeting. Naturally the Islington Moreton Bay fig trees were shown, bearing the caption, "Newcastle is almost devoid of upstanding groves of trees. This is one — the Islington Park figs".

MARINE STUDIES
Asked if he would care to single out any prints for special mention, Mr. Hansen characterized two marine studies by Frank B. Millington as "absolutely superb, showing a fine sense of the dramatic". He referred to the studies, "Storm Prelude" and "The Wave". He also commented highly on the prize-winning exhibit, "Pottery", by the president of the Newcastle Photographic Society (Mr. C.H. Shipway). "It is a splendid thing and well done", said Mr. Hansen. Incidentally, this print was published in "The Sun's" camera craft column a few weeks ago. In was an enlargement from a miniature negative. Mr. Hensen said that in the six photograph class, it was very difficult to make a decision and the first prize was awarded to J.P. Carney, because of his sense of artistry, although the subjects chosen did not make an ideal group.

ARTISTIC FIND
Commenting upon the fine arts display, Mr. Hansen singled out for special mention the work of Miss Joyce M. Sevil. "She shows an unusual degree of ability and Newcastle should have an ultimate artistic find in her", he said.

Generally speaking, he said, all the draftsmanship showed a big improvement technically over the past two years. The sense of form was more marked. "The quality of the craftsmanship is rather refreshing, showing a considerably better understanding of color values", said Mr. Hansen. "The poster section is not as advanced as the other classes, although a great improvement is shown".



Saturday 4th March 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

LIQUID HEAT
Mr. A.T. ULLMAN
Newcastle Photographic Society
is an entry in the Society's competition for prints depicting heat.

Saturday 11th March 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The Newcastle Photographic Society has altered its constitution to provide for meetings to be held on the first and third Tuesdays of each month, instead of each alternate Tuesday as in the past.

Mr. D. Cameron has consented to give a series of lectures on photographic chemistry and the first, given this week, was on very simple introductory chemistry and the function of the preservative.

A talk by Mr. A.H. Wilkinson at a recent meeting was most instructive. He spoke on short exposure and prolonged development, by which method the speed of films may be increased by approximately four times. This means that slow pan films can be used for fairly fast work, or even artificial light.

The March competition, "Hands", closes on 21st March. Arrangements for its own fully equipped dark — room have been completed by the Society.



Saturday 18th March 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

PRIZE-WINNING PRINT
This print by the Hon.Secretary of
Newcastle Photographic Society
(Mr. G. Garside) won first prize in the "Trees" section at Newcastle Show.
It was taken in Church Street, Newcastle, near the Courthouse.

Saturday 18th March 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CONCERNING SHOWS
Last week I threw out a few suggestions for the improvement of photographic sections at the Shows and a well-known Newcastle amateur and exhibitor has written to me endorsing the suggestions and adding one of his own.

He suggests that once a print has won a first prize in any show, it should be automatically disqualified from competing in all other shows. He goes further and suggests that if any print wins any competition, it should be debarred from all others, shows included. This suggestion is not inspired by jealousy, because my correspondent himself is a frequent prize-winner.

I am inclined to agree with him that after a print has won a prize, the exhibitor should retire gracefully and if he wants to exhibit in other shows, send prints of other subjects. Prize winning prints are not just flukes. They represent much time and thought and if a man can turn out one, he can turn out others. I would welcome the comments of other amateurs on this topic.

In conversation during the week with the Hon.Secretary of the Cessnock Agricultural Society (Mr. Bill Brown), Mr. Brown expressed pleasure at the large number of entries received by the Show Committee from Newcastle photographers this year and he said he hoped it would continue in future years.

Mr. Brown need have no fears on that score as long as the Show section is conducted by Cessnock Photographic Society and caters for the amateur as it does now. I understand that next year Newcastle Photographic Society will have a hand in the section at Newcastle Show. If the Show Committee permits this, it will meet with the approval of all photographers.

It is a pity that Maitland does not possess a Photographic Society to foster and encourage the art in that large area and to assist Maitland Show Committee with its annual section.

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The regular fortnightly meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society will be held on Tuesday 21st March, in the Howard Harris Studios, at 8pm.

Mr. Wilkinson will give a practical demonstration of portrait-lighting and members are requested to take along their cameras and make a few exposures. By doing this they will benefit fully from the demonstration.

Owing to the resignation of Mr. G. Garside as Hon.Secretary and Mr. D. Cameron as councilor, an election will be held to fill the vacancies thus created.

The closing date of the "Hands"' competition has been altered to 4th April.

Arrangements have now been completed for the club rooms of the Newcastle Photographic Society.

These are situated at the corner of Hunter and Auckland streets, on the first floor above Sargent's Cafe.

The Council of the Newcastle Photographic Society has arranged the following competition subjects for 1939:

March, "Hands", closes April 4;
April, "Children at Play", closes April 18;
May, "Texture", closes, May 16;
June, "Still Life", closes June 20;
July, "Landscape", closes, July 18;
August, "Shipping and Marine", closes August 15;
September. "Rainy Day Subject", closes, September 19;
October, "Glass", closes October 17;
November, "Doorways", closes, November 21;
December, "People Doing Things", closes, December 19;
January, 1940, "President's Subject". Closing date to be announced later.

Prints that have once gained points in A or B grade are not eligible for future competitions.



Saturday 22nd April 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The Newcastle Photographic Society is now installed in its new rooms at the corner of Auckland and Hunter streets and the first meeting in the new quarters was held this week. Mr. D. Cameron gave the second of the demonstrations on photographic developers — the function of the accelerator and the mystery of pH. Anyone who is interested in the work of the society is invited to attend its meetings. Information concerning the society may be had from the Hon.Secretary, Mr. D.I. Cameron, Newcastle, or from Mr. G. Garside, Kodak's, 124 Hunter-street, Newcastle.



Saturday 29th April 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
Tuesday 2nd May, is the date of the next meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society and it will be held in the Society's new rooms at the corner of Hunter and Auckland streets, at 8pm.

Mr. G. Garside will give a talk and demonstration on toning and the Hon.Secretary (Mr. D.I. Cameron) informs me that anyone who is interested is invited to attend. As Mr. Garside is an expert on his subject, this talk should provide valuable information on a fascinating sidelight of photography.

It should not be long now before the Club's darkroom is completed and available to members for developing, printing and enlarging their negatives.



Saturday 13th May 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

At the meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society, held on 2nd May, Mr. G. Garside gave an excellent demonstration on toning.

For some subjects the normal black and white print is not as pleasing as one which possesses a definite colored tone, as in sepia prints. Any properly prepared black and white enlargement can be easily toned sepia and two means of doing this were shown.

The rather slow hypo-alum toning did not prove so popular as sulphide toning and Mr. Garside gave a most convincing demonstration of the simplicity of sulphide toning. Prints were bleached in a bath consisting of potassium ferricynlde 1oz., potassium bromide 1/2 oz., water 10ozs. (stock solution), 1oz. stock solution, 10ozs. water, makes the bleaching solution.

This took a minute or two. The prints were then rinsed in four or five changes of water, taking about two minutes and were then placed in the toning bath, which was made as follows; Barium sulphide 1gr, water 10 ozs, (stock solution), 1oz. stock solution, water 10ozs., makes the toning solution.

In this they rapidly became a fine sepia tone. When the color was fully developed, the prints were washed in water for 10 minutes and dried to give the final toned print.

Barium sulphide is more suitable for amateur use than the sodium sulphide often recommended, as it does not cause blisters in the print, does not smell and will keep well.

For the best tones the enlargement must be correctly exposed and very fully developed. Prints must be thoroughly fixed and washed. Prints that had been intentionally under-developed, badly fixed and insufficiently washed were also toned to show the effects of each of these errors. The tones obtained were an unpleasant gingery or yellowish tone, contrasting strongly with the fine rich sepia of the properly prepared enlargement. In this way members gained a clear idea of what to avoid, as well as seeing how easy the process was if care was taken.

Mr. Garside also treated some yachting photos to produce most effective blue tones and also showed the range of tones, varying from a rich warm black to a chalky red that can be obtained by copper toning.

The next meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society will be at its rooms on the corner of Hunter and Auckland streets at 8pm on Tuesday 16th May.

Time will be given to the criticism of members prints by Mr. E.C. Sara and Mr. C.W. Burgess will give a talk on "Informal Portraiture". Entries for the May competition, "Texture", close on 16th May. In the open competition, Mr. D.I. Cameron was first, Mr. C.P. Hughes second and Mr. A.T. Ullman third.



Saturday 20th May 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
At the meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society, held on 16th May. Mr. E.C. Sara led a discussion on the pictorial values of the prints submitted by members.

Prints were considered under the eight headings of principality, variety, harmony, balance, unity, vitality, repose and mystery. Considerable discussion raged around several of the terms used, but by considering these various aspects of prints, it was easier to see why certain of them failed to appeal.

Mr. Burgess then gave a talk on "Informal Portraiture". Formal portraiture is limited by the necessity of producing a pleasing likeness and a number of informal portraits are more likely to give a good idea of the character and personality of the subject. A series of these will be very interesting in the future, to show how the person has changed.

Mr. Burgess showed a number of informal portraits to illustrate his point. Informal portraiture is not the same as candid photography, as the subject is actually cooperating with the photographer.

Results of the competition, "Heat" were: C.P. Hughes 1, H.W. Hall 2, A.T. Ullman 3.



Saturday 3rd June 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

The Hon.Secretary of the Newcastle Photographic Society (Mr. Cameron) will continue his talks on photographic chemistry at the next meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society on Tuesday night. This time he will deal with the restrainer in developing. At the meeting, there will be the usual prints criticized and a short talk will be given on "still life" in preparation for the monthly competition on that subject, which closes on 20th June.



Saturday 17th June 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

At the last meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society, Mr. D.I. Cameron gave a talk on the function of the restrainer in developers.

In any developer there is a tendency for the reducing agent, the metol, hydroquinone, etc., to act on the unexposed grains of silver bromide as well as on those that have been affected by light. This gives an all over fog, known as chemical fog, which generally appears either with solutions that are too warm or when development is prolonged. The restrainer slows down all reducing action and development takes longer, but the effect is more pronounced on the chemical fog than on the development of the image.

This means that by adding restrainer one can prolong development and obtain greater contrast. This was useful in the days when plates were developed individually, but nowadays when 8, 12 or 16 on a film are done at the one time, the restrainer, generally potassium bromide, is not varied at all.

At the meeting of the society held on 6th June, Mr. Cameron gave the third of his lectures on Photographic Chemistry. This time he dealt with the restrainer, potassium bromide. During the lecture Mr. Cameron explained with charts the use of potassium bromide, showing the varying degrees of fog obtained with the short use of bromide and also how the developer was slowed up considerably by using too much bromide.

The next meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society will be held at their rooms at the corner of Auckland and Hunter Streets on Tuesday 20th June at 8pm. Mr. Eric Merton, of Kodak Pty. Ltd., will give a demonstration of enlarging. Mr. Merton exhibits his photographs consistently overseas and it will be a welcome opportunity to see him in action.

The June competition, "Still Life", closes on Tuesday, June 20 and members are asked to bring along their entries to the meeting. The results of the May competition, "Texture", are as follows: A.H. Wilkinson 1, D. Cameron and R. Hughes tied for second place.



Saturday 24th June 1939  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The Newcastle Photographic Society held one of its most interesting meetings on Tuesday last, when Mr. Eric Merton, from Kodak Ltd., Sydney, gave a talk and demonstration on enlarging.

Mr. Merton, who is recognized as an enlarging expert, interested members with his demonstrations, showing his methods of control in making composite enlargements, printing clouds into cloudless landscapes and making panoramic scenes from any number of separate negatives.

To complete the evening's lecture, Mr. Merton also displayed 50 examples of his own work. These included a number of prints which have been hung in Australian salons.

The members of the society are looking forward to a special meeting on Tuesday 27th June, when they will be given a talk on photography by Mr. W. van der Velden, also from Kodak (A/asia) Pty. Ltd., Sydney.

An outing has been arranged for members to Gresford and district on Sunday 2nd July and those interested are invited to get in touch with Mr. Garside, of Kodak's, who will advise them of final arrangements.



Saturday 8th July 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
Many amateur photographers have expressed to me their appreciation of the action of Kodak's in allowing its technical expert, Mr. W. van der Velden, to visit Newcastle to lecture members of Newcastle Photographic Society.

Mr. van der Velden addressed the meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society, dealing with "distortion" and illustrating his points with lantern slides. He dealt briefly with the distortion produced by tilting the camera and by the use of wide-angle and telephoto lenses when the focal length of the lens used is too short or too long for the plate used to give a pleasing perspective.

The experience of Kodak's expert goes back to the days when panchromatic films and plates were a real novelty and he described the distortion of color values. In the early days, films were sensitive only to blue, so that that color appeared much too light and the greens, reds and yellows came out too dark. With the introduction of orthochromatic emulsions, greens and later, yellows, were rendered with greater fidelity and finally, as the sensitive effects of new dyes were found, the emulsions were made sensitive to red.

This was, of course, a great advance, but as the plates were still only slightly sensitive to red, color distortion, though minimized, was still present, rendering red too dark. Experiments and research continued until the supersensitive panchromatic emulsions were evolved and these, having a far greater reaction to red tones, caused distortion in the opposite direction — red tones appeared too light. In portrait work, lips and cheeks came out paler than desirable, giving a flatness to the face, losing the modeling of the lips and giving the mouth a slit tendency. It was found that for true color rendition with this type of film, a green filter was desirable, which meant longer exposures, but gave a finer balance of color.

FAST SUPER - X.X.
Recently, further improvements in panchromatic emulsions have produced films such as Super X.X., which are not only very fast, but have a balanced color response, so that all colors, except blue, are rendered fairly. Blue still persists in registering too strongly, giving unnaturally light tones and demanding a yellow filter to give true rendition. Many striking illustrations were given by Mr. van der Velden, including the use of a red filter on panchromatic plates for copying. The red filter gives contrasts, because, of all light falling on an object, it is the least subject to scattering by surface inequalities. Blue light is scattered in all directions and when falling on the lens, produces a flat effect. Scratches on wood, for example, catch blue light and reflect it strongly back to the lens, where it is registered to give a clear white line on the final print — much more obvious than the defect is to the eye. Through a red filter, all this blue light is stopped and the scratches are barely visible, while the grain of the wood stands out in its full beauty. During question time, the lecturer dealt with many topics and answered directly and entertainingly to the difficult questions and problems propounded.

KODAK SUPER XX FILM - PANCHROMATIC

Roll-film Size 116. For 8, 2 1/2" x 4 1/4"; 12, 2 1/2" x 2 7/8" or 16, 2 1/2" x 2 1/8" exposures. Wooden spool.
Roll-film size 118. For 6, 3 1/4" x 4 1/4" exposures. Wooden spool. Box.
Roll-film size 122. For 6, 3 1/4" x 5 1/2" exposures. Dated 1952. Box.
Roll-film size 828. For 28 x 40 mm exposures. Dated 1956. Kodak Ltd. address. Box.

This is an extra fast panchromatic emulsion introduced in 1938 in 35mm and 828 sizes as a replacement for SS Pan.
Other roll-film sizes, sheet film, film-packs and 35 mm cine film were later available.
Super XX was available until the mid 1950s. The speed in 1939 was 32° Kodak.



Saturday 15th July 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
A talk and demonstration on intensification and reduction will be given to members of Newcastle Photographic Society by Mr. A.H. Wilkinson on Tuesday 18th July.

There should be an interesting discussion, because the many grades of paper now available make these processes less widely used than they used to be. With the new color processes. however and the coming of special new emulsions, often available in one grade of contrast, the subject becomes increasingly important.

The society's July competition "Landscape", closes on 18th July and the subject for August is "Shipping".

Since the society has moved into its new rooms, there has been a steady increase in membership and it shows no signs of falling off. As has been emphasized in this column before, there is a great deal to be gained from membership of a society or club, especially when it holds monthly competitions. Those who have competed regularly have found that the general standard of their work improves steadily as they reap the benefit of the added efforts put into the work and of the criticisms that are offered.

Photographers desiring any information concerning Newcastle Photographic Society should get in touch with the Hon.Secretary (Mr. Cameron), Newcastle, or call at Kodak's in Hunter-street and interview Mr. G. Garside.



Saturday 22nd July 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
A talk on intensification and reduction was given to the Newcastle Photographic Society by Mr. Wilkinson during the week. Mr. Wilkinson explained that as far as negatives are concerned, if they are too thin, too dense or too contrasty, the simplest method is to retake the picture. If this is impossible, good results may be obtained in the laboratory. For intensifying a thin negative, or for giving depth to a print the highlights of which are satisfactory, copper intensifier is one of the most effective solutions and the method is very simple.

Equal amounts of a 10 per cent, solution of copper sulphate and 10 per cent, potassium bromide are mixed. The negative or print is soaked in water and then immersed in the mixture until the original black image is entirely bleached to a light brown. A short rinse in water follows and then it is immersed in a five per cent, solution of nitric acid. A word of caution: Strong nitric acid will burn holes in clothes and flesh. A five per cent, solution is safe, but should be handled with care. A short wash in water and the image is either developed in any ordinary developer (not fine grain), or placed in a 10 per cent, solution of barium sulphate. The latter gives a sepia image, very pleasing in a print and giving increased contrast in a negative for enlarging.

OTHER METHODS SHOWN
Of the other methods shown, the most generally useful was the chromium intensifier method. For this, three parts of 10 per cent, solution of potassium dichromate, two parts of 10 per cent, hydrochloric acid and five parts of water are mixed and the image bleached in this. The negative is well washed until the yellow stain is gone. This takes time and a bath in five per cent, solution of potash alum helps to speed it up. The image is then redeveloped in a good light in any normal developer. If this is carried to finality, the whole negative is intensified. Mr. Wilkinson also showed the reduction of density in a negative by the use of Farmer's Reducer. The negative is soaked in water and then placed in a plain hypo bath, to which sufficient 10 per cent, solution of potassium ferricyanide has been added to give a definite pale lemon color. The negative is removed and washed in water to stop the reaction. If it has not gone far enough, the process can be repeated and reduction by several stages is desirable to prevent going too far. This reducer increases contrast as it attacks the thinner portions of the negative more rapidly than the lesser ones. Mr. Wilkinson showed other processes, but emphasized clearly that the better way was to retake the negative where that was possible.

SOCIETY ACTIVITIES
On 1st August, the Rev. Frank Cash comes from Sydney to give a lecture to members of Newcastle Photographic Society on lantern slides. The society invites all who are interested in this subject to attend the meeting, which will be an open one, illustrated by numerous slides. In order that as many as possible may attend and the slides shown to the best advantage, the meeting place will be announced in this column on Saturday 29th July. The lecture is to be in a number of sections and will cover the whole range of making, preparing and presenting lantern slides. Rev. Frank Cash is a leading authority in this branch of photographic work and the news that he is to visit Newcastle is very welcome.



Friday 28th July 1939  Page 10 - The Cessnock Eagle and South Maitland Recorder (NSW)

CAMERA FANS INVITED TO NEWCASTLE - LANTERN SLIDE DEMONSTRATION
Members of the Cessnock Photographic Society have been invited to became the guests of the Newcastle Photographic Society at its meeting on Tuesday night next.

The highlight of the Newcastle meeting will be an address and demonstration by Rev. Frank Cash, of Sydney, an authority on the production and projection of lantern slides. To enable the slides to be projected, the meeting will be held at Blackall House, Newcomen-street. It will commence at 7.45pm.

The circular of the Newcastle Photographic Society announcing the meeting indicates that the Society will probably follow the lead of the Cessnock Photographic Society by introducing handicaps into set-subject competitions.

CESSNOCK MEETING
The next meeting of the Cessnock Photographic Society will be held on 6th August.

Prints entered for the recent portraiture competition will be criticized at the meeting by Dr. C.A. Wiles. Entries for the child study competition will be accepted at the meeting.

Special features will be addresses on photographic lighting and the making of photographic personal greeting cards. Members are invited to bring their cameras to the meeting for the purpose of making exposures with the lighting equipment that will he used for the demonstration.



Saturday 29th July 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

The next meeting of Newcastle Photographic Society will be held in Blackall House, Newcomen Street, Newcastle, on Tuesday 1st August, when the subject of lantern slide making will be dealt with exhaustively by Rev. Frank Cash, who is a leading authority on the subject. The society is making this meeting an open one and invites everybody interested in the subject to attend. The lecture starts promptly at 7.45pm and is expected to last until 10pm.

Rev. Cash will describe the method of copying from a picture or type, explaining time of exposure for plate or film and the law of exposure. He will deal with the quality and density of negatives - illustrated by negatives for examination at the meeting and the making of lantern slides of contact and projection.

He will deal also with the following, masks to adjust the area on the lantern plate, the make and characteristic of the lantern plate to suit the particular density of a negative; Kodak lantern plates for type, for a picture to be copied and for any outdoor negative; Kodak plates and the properties peculiar to them; the thiocarbaminde process on Kodak Austral plates; Ilford lantern plates - density of negative required and the wide range of colors; a note on toning and the changes in contrast from the plain black and white slides; the effect of time of development on subsequent toning; masking, titling and binding and template. Everything will be illustrated by finished slides, to be handled at the meeting.

The August competition of the society, "Shipping", closes on August 15. The committee is considering the question of handicaps and if these are decided upon, they will probably come into effect in this competition.



Saturday 12th August 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The art of lantern slide making was explained to members of Newcastle Photographic Society and others at the society's last meeting, by the Rev. P. Cash, who is an expert in the work. The meeting was an open one, held at Blackall House.

The speaker, in the first two hours, covered every phase of the subject, illustrating his points with numerous projected slides. One outstanding feature was the beauty and brilliance of the pictures shown. It was difficult to realize that so much added beauty could be brought out with a lantern slide.

In several cases the original reproduction was shown and then the lantern slide made from it. The resulting increase in luminosity was remarkable. With a print on paper, the darkest portions reflect back about one-fortieth as much light as the highest light, so that extreme contrasts of light and shade are impossible. With a lantern slide, this is not the case, as the light falling on the highlights can be very strong and the deepest shadows can have almost no light at all to give a rich deep black. The same sort of thing is seen in some negatives, which look splendid when held up to the light, but from which satisfactory prints are hard to obtain.

TONING LANTERN SLIDES

Many toned lantern slides were shown. Some of the most beautiful obtained their tones by direct development, as in the thiocarbonide process. A rather difficult process, but from the results, well worth while.

The lecturer projected many slides, threw out useful tips and hints. He said that when copying by artificial light, the lights thrown on to the picture for focusing should be used, but when all is ready for the exposure, the lamps should be turned away from the picture, so that only highly diffused indirect light falls upon it. This increases exposure considerably, but that does not matter much, because a very clear negative free from unwanted surface shine is obtained.

The next meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society will be held on Tuesday 15th August, at 8pm, when the night will be devoted to print criticism. All members are asked to take a print along to the meeting. The August competition on "shipping" closes that night.

For September, the competition subject is open and the committee hopes to have an entry from every member.



Saturday 26th August 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

Saturday 2nd September 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

Saturday 2nd September 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The next meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society will be held at 8pm, on Tuesday 5th September, when Mr. D.I. Cameron will give a demonstration of photographic copying without a camera and Mr. C.R. Hardy will give a talk on spotting prints. There will also be a section devoted to print criticism.

The next competition closes on 19th September and the subject is an open one. The October competition subject is "Doorways Day or Night". The program for the remainder of the year is almost ready and we expect to have a number of visiting lecturers from Sydney. Mr. Mallard is to give a demonstration on bromoils, Mr. Metcalfe a talk on pictorial construction and Mr. Berney one on portraiture by artificial light. These lectures by leading members of the Photographic Society of New South Wales will be a great help to Newcastle members and will be held on the third Tuesdays in September, October and November.

At the last meeting the darkroom was officially opened and we have now a darkroom equipped with an upto-date enlarger, making board, stainless steel dishes, developing tank, etc., for the use of members. These facilities, together with the program of meetings, including the lecturers from Sydney, should make our present steady increase in membership increase still more and the society will welcome anyone who is interested in photography.



Saturday 9th September 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
At this week's meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society Mr. D.I. Cameron gave a demonstration of photographic copying without a camera.

The process is particularly suitable for printing, graphs and line subject's generally and is rapid and surprisingly efficient. The subject to be copied, an illustration or drawing in a magazine for example, is placed face upward. On top of this is placed a sheet of contrasting bromide paper (single weight) with the emulsion in contact with the drawing. A heavy sheet of glass is placed on top to hold the two in firm contact. Exposure is made through the back of the bromide paper with ordinary white light and the paper is developed to finality (at least two minutes) to a normal developer, or a contrast hydroquinone developer for preference. A test strip is desirable and exposure is of the order of five seconds at four feet from a 60-watt light.

The paper can be exposed either to give a reversed copy in white and black, or can be used as a negative to give a normal positive print. There is a certain amount of mottling from the paper base, but this is unexpectedly little for a line subject. The principle underlying the process is as follows: The light falling on the paper passes through the back and gives an all-over exposure to the emulsion, where there is white paper in the drawing light is reflected back to give an additional exposure, where there are black portions the light is absorbed and no further exposure is given. It is on this difference that the process depends and contrasting papers and developers are used to increase this effect. Increased contrast can also be obtained by the application of Farmers' reducer. The method is quite effective for making rapid copies for reference purposes and involves nothing more than the normal handling of bromide paper.

The meeting concluded with print criticism and a survey of the competition prints for still life and landscape. The results were as follows: Still Life, Mr. A.H. Wilkinson, 1; Mr. G. Garside and C.P. Hughes, equal 2. Landscape, Mr. D.I. Cameron, 1. Mr. A.T. Ullman 2, Mr. C.P. Hughes 3. The next competition is an open one.

For the next meeting Mr. Mallard of Harrington's Pty. Ltd., is coming from Sydney to give a demonstration on bromides on 19th September and an invitation is extended to those who are interested to attend this meeting.

HENRI MALLARD

Saturday 9th September 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The Newcastle Photographic Society's meeting on February 6 was well attended and two advanced members lectured and demonstrated.

Enlarging was covered by H.W. Hall. This proved very enjoyable and instructive. During the demonstration the art of printing clouds into enlargements was very well handled. The advantage of this composite printing is that when the photographer is unable to wait for suitable skies to make his picture, he can afterwards print in any clouds he so desires; quiet streaky clouds, to dramatic for stormy effects, or good cumulus clouds for landscapes. The method used is very simple, but a little practice is required. First, the enlargement must be printed, but all the sky must be held back by shading with the hands, or dodging cards. The foreground or skyline must then be marked with pencil (grease type) before the paper is moved from the enlarging easel. After the paper is removed a suitable sky negative must then be inserted into the negative carrier and focused on to a plain sheet of paper until a sky or clouds of the correct type are found. It must also be remembered that the clouds are lighted in the same direction as the print they are to be combined with that is, the sun must have been in the same direction in both negatives. After the clouds have been decided upon and all focused up, the enlargement that has been shaded is now placed on the easel and the foreground must be shaded up to the pencil lines previously marked. This time to expose the clouds, after exposure wash the pencil lines away in water and develop. It should be remembered that test prints arc well worth while. One for the foreground and one for the clouds will save a lot of time and guess work in calculating the exposure.

Mr. R. Hardy followed with a lecture on "Retouching Negatives and Spotting". During his talk Mr. Hardy explained the construction of a home made retouching desk and then followed with the application of the medium and general use of the pencils.

METHODS USED
The medium is applied as follows: Place the negative on a clean flat surface, drop one or two drops on to the negative and with a tuft of cotton wool rub well into the emulsion with a circular motion so that when you finish you have a nice smooth coat of medium on the negative. The smoother the surface the easier it is to retouch.

The pencil stroke is the foundation of all your work. Much concentration and patience is required to learn a stroke that will blend and yet model at the same time. For the beginner, use a HB pencil with the lead sharpened about an inch long and ground to a very fine needle point. Hold the pencil easily. Do not grip it. Give your arm free, light movement. Never retouch with the fingers stiff; use the whole hand and arm quite freely. Forehead wrinkles are good practice. Start in the center and work towards the edges. Use a free, wavy stroke and never use straight lines. Remember that the light parts of the negative are the dark parts on the prints.

Spotting prints is very interesting work, Windsor and Newton or Eastman spotting colors give you white, black, sepia and your thumb nail a good palette. Spotting brushes, 0, 1, 2, are mostly used. In selecting your brushes be sure the point tapers to a fine needle point. Spots on prints are caused from dust or scratches on the negative, which, when enlarged, are much more prominent. When spotting prints be sure to match the water color with the tone surrounding the spot and do not apply too heavily. Use your brush as lightly as possible. When spotting matte prints, the use of a carbon pencil can also be recommended. Grade HB is just about hard enough and after spotting the prints they can be held in the steam of a kettle to aid permanence.



Saturday 16th September 1939  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
At the Newcastle Photographic Society's meeting on Tuesday 19th September, Mr. H.J. Mallard, of Harrington's Pty. Ltd., will give a demonstration on Bromoils. Mr. Mallard has done and exhibited a great deal of Bromoil work and the Society is looking forward to this special visit.

Bromoils are apt to cause discussion when photographers gather together, as the photographic purist distrusts the element of personal control in the medium. This element of control means that the bromoil process is far more flexible than straight bromide printing and allows of easy control of the tone values of the print. In addition there are the pleasing texture of a bromoil print and the wide variety of tones available as pigments to give it that distinctive appearance that many people find more pleasing than a straight print.

It will be good to see the process in operation and the society invites all who are interested to attend this meeting which will be held in the Society's rooms at the corner of Auckland and Hunter streets at 8pm.



January 1940  Page 37 - Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
JUDGING YOUR OWN PICTURES
The Newcastle Photographic Society have decided upon a system of marking for competition prints which it would be well worth while many amateurs using for the purpose of considering the success of their own prints, more especially before sending them in for comment by others.

Selection of subject, viewpoint and lighting - 25 marks
Composition and pictorial sense shown - 25 marks
Exposure and development of negative - 20 marks
Enlarging technique - 20 marks
Mounting - 10 marks
Total - 100 marks



Saturday 20th January 1940  Page 3 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The serious amateur photographer — the man or Woman who makes of the art a hobby which engages most of his or her spare time — has often been spoken of as the one upon which the subject depends. Whereas the professional, by reason of necessity, cannot devote time to experiment and research, the amateur can and does and in this city he is assisted in every possible way by the Newcastle Photographic Society.

The Newcastle Photographic Society has just concluded another successful year. It is a young, but energetic body and in the few years of its existence has done a great deal towards improving the standard of amateur photography in the district.

Gone are the days when the amateur photograph meant a vague object under-exposed and over-printed on a piece of hypo-stained paper. The ancient "wise-crack" that an amateur photographer is a person who takes the worst possible view of things, has been relegated to the place where all such "chestnuts" finish up. Amateur photography these days, especially when sponsored and carried on in such a manner as by the Newcastle Photographic Society, is an art, as the many prize-winning exhibits at the Show in past years have proved.

It has been emphasized before in this column, that to get the most out of his hobby, an amateur cannot do better than join a Society or Camera Club, which has all the facilities to place at his disposal.

The Newcastle Photographic Society had a very eventful year. Its financial membership at the beginning of the period was 22. Three members left the district, but 15 new ones joined, making a total of 34 when the year ended.

Perhaps the biggest forward step was the acquisition in 1939 of a very complete meeting-room and darkroom, for the use of members. The darkroom is equipped with an enlarger, masking board, developing dishes and tanks, scales, safe-lights and the one hundred and one other accessories necessary for the prosecuting of this most fascinating subject.

Valuable assistance in several ways was given during the year by several firms, the Newcastle Photographic Society notes in its annual report and it goes on to thank Kodak (Australasia) Pty. Ltd., for having made available the services of Messrs Van der Velden, Eric Merton and Keast Burke, who visited Newcastle to give instructive lectures. Thanks were accorded also to Harrington's Ltd., who made available Messrs. Mallard and Berney to give lectures. Special comment is reserved for the visit of Rev. Frank Cash, an expert on his subject, who gave one of the most interesting lectures and demonstrations of the year, upon the art of lantern slides.

OTHER ACTIVITIES
Several outings were held during the year and proved most enjoyable. They gave members the opportunity of combining business with pleasure — social enjoyment added to the more serious business of picture-making.

A portfolio of prints from the Wellington Photographic Society proved an interesting exhibit in 1939.

Each month the Newcastle Photographic Society held a competition on various subjects and these contests showed a marked improvement in the standard of work. The society's thanks were accorded to Mr. Walsoe, of Kodak's Sydney branch, who assisted a great deal by marking and commenting on a number of competition entries.

The year ended on a very successful note with the annual dinner, which was followed by an exhibition of photographs taken by members.

Officers elected for the ensuing 12 months were: President, Mr. C.P. Hughes; Vice-president, Mr. E.C. Sara; Hon.Treasurer, Mr. J.H. Houghton; Hon.Secretary, Mr. H.W. Hall; Committee, Messrs. C.H. Shipway, G. Garside and D.I. Cameron.



Saturday 17th February 1940  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The next meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society will be held on Tuesday 20th February, at 8pm, at the clubrooms, corner of Hunter and Auckland streets, Newcastle. There is no set lecture for this meeting, but members will enter into a discussion of "Whether Gadgets are Desirable or Not". This question should cause quite an Interesting debate. Members are reminded that the February competition, "Seascape" closes on the meeting night. Mr. D. Cameron, the competition Hon.Secretary, is expecting a good roll up of prints.



Saturday 9th March 1940  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
"Gadgets are Desirable" against "Gadgets are a Nuisance" was the subject of the meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society, held on 20th February.

Gadgets were classified as any accessory other than the camera, film or developing and printing aids.

Mr. J. Randle led the discussion by speaking in favor of the above and mentioned lens caps for the protection of the lens, lens hoods for the elimination of flare in against-the-light photographs, over-ready cases for camera protection and also to enable the camera to be used without removing it from the case; cable releases and tripods for time exposures, auxiliary lens for close-ups and for copying; color filters for color and sky correction for clouds and lastly, exposure meter, so that correctly exposed negatives may be obtained. Mr. Houghton, Mr. Ullman and Mr. Garside also spoke in favor of the above.

Mr. D.I. Cameron spoke against the use of gadgets. His many reasons were that they were frequently left at home, mislaid or broken, when one came to use them, but lastly filled one's pockets to bursting point.

Mr. E.C. Sara and Mr. Burgess also spoke against the use of gadgets.

The Council of the Newcastle Photographic Society is considering a scheme for instructing the beginners or those new and prospective members in the elementary stages of photography, that is, development of films, contact printing and enlarging. These lectures are to be given by the advanced members and it has been suggested that the first, third and possibly, the fifth Mondays of the month will be made available for these classes.

The competition subject for March will be "Portrait" (male) and will close on the last meeting in March.

A cordial welcome is extended to any person interested in photography to go along and meet some very enthusiastic members who will do all they can to assist in any of his photographic problems.



Saturday 16th March 1940  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The Newcastle Photographic Society departed somewhat from the usual activities at the last meeting held on 5th March. On this night was screened 8mm movie films, taken by Mr. J. Fallins of Whitebridge on his recent trip abroad. Altogether there would be approximately 1200ft. of film showing interesting life and scenic spots of London, North of England, Glasgow, Edinburgh, France and America.

Mr. Fallins showed the magnitude of the Grand Canyon, the night lights of Broadway and the World's Fair, all taken in Kodachrome natural color film. Members followed this with interest and it fully demonstrated the capabilities of 8mm cine photography. A vote of thanks to Mr. Fallins was expressed by Mr. Ullman and seconded by Mr. Cameron.

The meeting to be held on 19th March at 8pm will be devoted to "Print Criticism". when it is hoped that all members will bring along at least one print for constructive criticism. Prints need not be mounted. A short talk will also be given on color transparencies. The March competition, "Portrait" (male) closes on 19th March.

Members who are desirous of attending the learner classes are notified that the first series of lectures and demonstrations will be held on 18th March at the rooms at 8pm. Mr. Hall will talk on emulsions and the problems of exposure and development. It is hoped that members and prospective members will attend these classes as they are sure to improve their knowledge of the subject.

Special provision has been made for junior members in the Society when any person under the age of 21 years will only be charged half the normal rates, namely, 6d a week. This provides for the full privileges of the society. Any person desirous of joining the society and obtaining the benefits of the learners' class, should get in touch with Hon.Secretary H.W. Hall, or G. Garside, Kodak, 9 Wolfe-street, Newcastle.



Saturday 20th April 1940  Page 3 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The Newcastle Photographic Society had an interesting and instructive lecture on Astronomical Photography, given to members by Mr. Mark Howarth. During the talk, Mr. Howarth imparted a great deal of scientific information on the sun, moon and planetary system and his remarks were illustrated by a large number of lantern slides of a high technical excellence.

The lecturer explained that astronomical photography required a wide range of exposures, varying from l/100th of a second when photographing the sun, to exposures of several hours in the case of constellations of stars and that It was necessary for the telescope to which the camera was mounted, to follow the movement of stars during the exposure in order to record them with perfect definition. For the shortest exposure, the fastest photographic emulsions were used, while, conversely, the fastest exposures required the slowest emulsions.

To those members not scientifically minded, the distances of the planets from the earth, as quoted by the speaker, were amazing. Astronomers, however, were able to calculate these distances, as well as the size, speed and direction of travel of these celestial bodies with great mathematical precision. Of the slides projected, perhaps the most striking were those depicting the appearance of the moon's surface. The crust of the moon was clearly seen to be covered with huge craters and because of the strong directional lighting from the sun, the effect was one of strong bas-relief. Of the stars, Mars was the nearest to the earth and as astronomical instruments showed evidence of vegetation on its surface, it was reasonable to suppose that some form of life existed on the planet.

SUN PHOTOGRAPHED
Photographs of the sun, which is 93,000,000 miles from the earth, depicted it as a great luminous globe with heat-waves emanating from its circumference. Several excellent slides were also shown of the sun and moon in total and partial eclipse.

Mr. Howarth explained that the photography of planets was possible only at certain times of the year, according to their positions with relation to that of the earth. At the end of the lecture, which was one of the most interesting ever delivered to the society. Mr. Howarth was accorded a vote of thanks at the instance of Messrs. C.H. Shipway and J. Houghton.

The society's next meeting will be on 22nd April in the club rooms, when Messrs. H. Hall, C. Shipway and G. Garside will talk and demonstrate on the uses of Kodak, bromide, Kodabrom and Kodura enlarging papers. Information concerning the society and its activities may be had from the Hon.Secretary (Mr. Hall), 224 Darby Street, Newcastle, or from Mr. Garside, of Kodak, 9 Wolfe Street, Newcastle.



Friday 3rd May 1940  Page 6 - The Cessnock Eagle and South Maitland Recorder (NSW)

CAMERA CLUB TO MEET AT MAITLAND - PATERSON RIVER OUTING
Because of the May Day holiday this week-end, the May meeting of the Cessnock Photographic Society will be held on the night of the second Sunday of the month, 12th May. The meeting will be held at the home of Mr. F.B. Mattocks, at Quenn-Street, Lorn, West Maitland.

The speaker for the meeting will be Mr. C. Piggott, of Newcastle, a member of the Newcastel Sun-Herald Photographic Staff. He will describe the home processing of movie film and will give an actual demonstration of the reversal processing of a roll of sub-standard film.

For the entertainment of members after the meeting, 16mm films depicting thrills of big-game fishing will be shown by Mr. Athel D'Ombrain, of Maitland.

The meeting will take place after an informal outing to be conducted on the Stradbroke property of Mr. F. Sparke on the Paterson River. Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society will join Cessnock Photographic Society members on the outing.

Cessnock Photographic Society members not traveling by car will leave Cessnock by train or by the 9am bus and will connect with the 10am Gresford bus at Church-street, West Maitland. The scene of the outing is approximately nine miles from West Maitland.



Tuesday 14th May 1940  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

MINIATURE CAMERA GROUP (SYDNEY)
EXHIBITION OF ACTION PHOTOGRAPHY
Nearly 200 photographs enlarged from negatives two and a quarter inches square or less will be on display at Scott's to-morrow, when the Miniature Camera Group of Sydney will hold its first exhibition in Newcastle.

Formed in Sydney about a year ago by 32 professional and amateur photographers, the objects of the group are to capture in black and white those moments which are gone too quickly for the ordinary camera.

Almost every picture in the exhibition depends for its point not on the subject alone, but on the instant at which that subject was caught. A breaking wave, a shark's smooth passage through the light and darkness of deep water, a bow from the stage, the shadow of the afternoon sun, a frog before he hops, the glint in a snake's eye are some of the studies that have been caught in the instant of seeing.

The exhibition which has been sponsored by the Newcastle Photographic Society will remain open for a week.



Wednesday 15th May 1940  Page 1 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

MINIATURE CAMERA GROUP (SYDNEY)
EXHIBITION OF ACTION PHOTOGRAPHY
To-day the NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY presents an exhibition by the MINIATURE CAMERA GROUP of Sydney. There are upwards of 200 large-sized Pictures of landscapes, still life, architectural and figure studies. You will enjoy every minute you spend with them and you will come again and again. There is no charge for admission and the Photographs are located in SCOTT'S EXHIBITION HALL, 2ND FLOOR.



Thursday 16th May 1940  Page 1 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

MINIATURE CAMERA GROUP (SYDNEY)
The NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY presents an exhibition by the MINIATURE CAMERA GROUP of Sydney. The Newcastle "Herald's" Photographic Expert was asked yesterday for his opinion on the Exhibition, and which photograph he was going to reproduce. "Well", he said, "it's a beautiful Show and most of them could be reproduced, but I think it will be "Dry Sails". You will see this picture and nearly 200 others which make up a really marvelous Photographic Show. Exhibition Hall, 2nd Floor, at Scott's.



Friday 17th May 1940  Page 1 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

MINIATURE CAMERA GROUP (SYDNEY)
Exhibition by NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY of photos by the MINIATURE CAMERA GROUP of Sydney. Almost 200 enlarged studies depicting landscapes, figures, still life. You'll be so delighted with these that you will not be satisfied with just a cursory glance. The artistic detail presented in each picture will make you feel you want to come again and again to study them. Showing in SCOTT'S EXHIBITION HALL, SECOND FLOOR.



Saturday 18th May 1940  Page 1 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

MINIATURE CAMERA GROUP (SYDNEY)
Have you seen the delightful display of photographs by the MINIATURE CAMERA GROUP of Sydney. This display, which is daily drawing big crowds, is exhibited to-day and all next week in SCOTT'S EXHIBITION HALL, SECOND FLOOR.



Monday 20th May 1940  Page 1 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

MINIATURE CAMERA GROUP (SYDNEY)
EVERYBODY'S INTERESTED IN PICTURES
Especially those of the Miniature Camera Group of Sydney now being shown in SCOTT'S EXHIBITION HALL, 2ND FLOOR. Nothing like these has ever been exhibited in Newcastle before. The range of subjects is wide, the atmosphere in many is delightful, while the technique is equal to the best camera artists overseas have yet produced; in fact, this Exhibition is so good that no one who is interested in any of the arts should miss it. There is no charge for admission. Just take any lift in Scott's to the 2nd floor. The Exhibition is sponsored by the Newcastle Photographic Society.



Thursday 23rd May 1940  Page 1 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

MINIATURE CAMERA GROUP (SYDNEY)
SCOTTS
STILL SHOWING IN OUR EXHIBITION HALL, 2nd FLOOR
The photographic studies of the Miniature Camera Group of Sydney are displayed until this weekend. Everyone who has seen the display has enthused over the delightful landscapes, still life and figures depicted in black and white. There has not been anything like it in Newcastle before. Sponsored by the Newcastle Photographic Society.



Friday 24th May 1940  Page 2 - The Cessnock Eagle and South Maitland Recorder (NSW)

ADDRESS BY NEWS CAMERAMAN
Mr. Cec. Piggott, news cameraman of the Sun-Herald staff at Newcastle, will be the speaker at the June meeting of the Cessnock Photographic Society.

The meeting will be held at the home of Mr. F.B. Mattocks at Lorn, West Maitland, on the night of 2nd June. During the day there will be an informal outing on the Stradbroke property of Mr. F. Sparke, on the Paterson River. Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society will join the Cessnock Photographic Society members on the outing and at the meeting at night.

Entries from Cessnock Photographic Society members for the Still Life competition should be submitted by Tuesday next. Entries for the competition for Flower and Tree photography are also due.



Saturday 25th May 1940  Page 3 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
On the 2nd June an informal outing will be held at Stradbroke, on the Paterson River by the Cessnock Photographic Society. Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society are being invited to attend the outing and the meeting at night.



Saturday 1st June 1940  Page 3 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
An address on aerial photography will be given by Mr. C. Piggott. of Newcastle, at the June meeting of Cessnock Photographic Society to-morrow night, at the home of Mr. P.B. Mattocks, at Lorn, West Maitland. After the meeting a series of 16mm films, depicting highlights of big game fishing, will be screened by Mr. Athel P. D'Ombrain. Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society will join, members of the Cessnock Photographic Society on an outing to be held on Sunday at Stradbroke, near Paterson and will also attend the meeting at night.



Tuesday 4th June 1940  Page 1 - The Cessnock Eagle and South Maitland Recorder (NSW)

CAMERA SOCIETY MEETS AT MAITLAND
Scenic features of the Paterson River were photographed on Sunday, when members of the Cessnock Photographic Society held an outing at Stradbroke. Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society joined in the outing.

At the home of Mr. F.B. Mattocks, at Lorn, at night a well attended meeting of the Cessnock Photographic Society was addressed by Mr. C. Piggott, of Newcastle.

Illustrating his talk with large reproductions of commercial photographs taken by him in various parts of the State. Mr. Piggott described the special features of aerial photography. He dealt with the importance of aerial photography in warfare as well as for commercial purposes in times of peace and described the particular equipment most suited for the purpose.

The address disclosed difficulties apart from those associated with the technical side of photography. Mr. Piggott said that, when working at extreme altitudes, the danger of frost-bite was acute. Certain photography demanded an ascent to 20,000 feet, or even higher and the continuous wearing of gloves while at work was imperative.

On other occasions, he said, power dives were necessary in order to manoeuvre for the favorable photography of other planes. On such occasions the photographer encountered the difficulties associated with the rapidly increasing air pressure.

FISHING THRILLS
Thrills of leaping marlin and other big-game fish were shown in films screened at the meeting by Mr. Athel D'Ombrain. of Maitland. The films were photographed in New Zealand waters and off the New South Wales coast.

After the screening, Mr. Athel D'Ombrain was congratulated by Mr. Piggott on the high standard of his work.

Motions of thanks to Messrs Poggott and D'Ombrain and to Mr. and Mrs Mattocks for the use of their home were carried by acclamation.

NEWCASTLE OUTING
A return outing, to which members of the Cessnock Photographic Society will be invited, will be arranged by the Newcastle Photographic Society at its next meeting. It is likely that the location will be in the vicinity of Redhead or on the shores of Lake Macquarie. The outing will be held this month.



Saturday 8th June 1940  Page 3 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CLUB OUTING
Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society attended the Cessnock Photographic Society's outing held last Sunday at Stradbroke on the Paterson River. Undulating green country and old gums provided a typical Australian landscape with ample material for the cameras.

After the outing members, of the Cessnock Photographic Society met at the home of Mr. F.B. Mattocks at Lorn, West Maitland. The address for the meeting was given by Mr. C.A. Piggott of Newcastle who discussed Aerial Photography.

The effect of varying working conditions was illustrated with photographs taken from altitudes in some cases above 20,000 feet.

The thrills of big-game fishing were reproduced in 16mm films shown by Mr. A. D'Ombrain. Shots taken in New Zealand waters and in some cases off the coast of New South Wales, showed leaping marlin and stages of the battle in landing them.



Tuesday 18th June 1940  Page 4 - The Cessnock Eagle and South Maitland Recorder (NSW)

CAMERA CLUB OUTING
Members of the Cessnock Photographic Society have been invited by members of the Newcastle Photographic Society to attend an outing to be held on Sunday next in the Swansea-Belmont district. Cars will leave Newcastle from the Newcastle Society's rooms at Hunter and Auckland streets at 10.30am.



Saturday 22nd June 1940  Page 3 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The Newcastle Photographic Society has had two very interesting lectures recently.

On 27th May members and visitors had the privilege of hearing Mr. Henri Mallard, of Harringtons Ltd., Sydney and this was followed by constructive criticism of the prints of members who benefited by Mr. Mallard's remarks. The lecturer commended the very excellent technical quality of the work and of the pictorial sense shown by the members in composing prints.

The meeting on 10th June, was quite a change in the way of photographic lectures, when Mr. A.F. D'Ombrain, of Maitland, demonstrated and explained the material and methods used in the photographing of animal life in action at night with the use of flashlight equipment.

This equipment is erected at the position, first located by very careful examination of the ground for fresh tracks left by the animals to be photographed. The equipment is erected and a trip wire stretched across the path or track and connected to the flashlight attachment and to the camera. When the wire is pulled or stretched the flash is ignited by a fuse from a battery, which explodes the flash powder and trips the shutter of the camera.

Mr. D'Ombrain demonstrated the working of the equipment by actually setting up the gear and exposing a plate which was later developed and enlarged for members examination.

The next meeting will be held on 24th June, when the evening will be taken up with print criticism. At this meeting the society will also see a very good collection of natural color slides kindly loaned by Mr. Walton, of Sydney.

An outing has been arranged in conjunction with the Cessnock Photographic Society and the Newcastle Photographic Society to the Swansea locality tomorrow (Sunday). Members will meet at 10am at the club rooms, corner Auckland and Hunter Streets. This promises to be a very interesting day, when members of each society will get together once again.

The meeting on 8th July will be the occasion for another Sydney lecturer, when Mr. Berney will lecture on Bromide paper. Details will be announced at a later date.



Friday 5th July 1940  Page 7 - The Cessnock Eagle and South Maitland Recorder (NSW)

GALA WEEK FOR CAMERA FANS - NOTABLE SPEAKER TO VISIT CESSNOCK
If camera fans on the coalfields take advantage of the facilities offered them this week by the Cessnock Photographic Society, they will not only be well occupied, but will considerably enhance their knowledge of the art.

The Cessnock Photographic Society will hold its monthly meeting at Wakley's Chambers on Sunday night, when a paper by a leading Sydney pictorialist will be read. On Monday night its members have been invited to attend a meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society, at which Mr. Berney, a Sydney photographer, will give a practical demonstration to illustrate the production of that elusive property known as print quality.

On Wednesday night Cessnock will receive a visit from Mr. Eric Merton, Interstate technical service officer for Kodak. Arrangements are being made by the Cessnock Photographic Society for him to give an address and demonstration. In addition to discussing the latest technical developments, which will prove of interest for advanced amateurs, Mr. Merton has been asked to give a talk on matters of interest to the not-so-advanced worker.

For Mr. Merton's visit, the Board Room at Cessnock Hospital has been made available. An invitation to attend is issued to all persons interested in photography.

ART CRITIC
The experience of many years association with photography is behind the preparation of a paper by the Sydney Art critic, Mr. Mallard which will be read at the meeting of Cessnock Photographic Society on Sunday night.



Saturday 20th July 1940  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The war and its inevitable restrictions upon photography has not dampened the enthusiasm of Newcastle Photographic Society, which, in fact, is growing steadily.

Mr. J.A. BERNEY, of Harrington's Pty. Ltd. and the Photographic Society of New South Wales, visited Newcastle to give a talk and demonstration on bromide print quality and the talk proved very enlightening to members. Most photographers can turn out passable enlargements by following the directions given by the manufacturers of the various papers, although far too many amateurs try all sorts of fancy developers and never seem to master any of them.

To get the best possible print on any paper is a purely mechanical process if carried out in the manner demonstrated by Mr. Berney. He first determined how long It was necessary to leave the paper in the developer in order to obtain the richest and deepest black that the paper can give. This was done in a strong white light, which exposed the paper completely. It was then placed in the developer so that only a portion was immersed and held there until it had developed to a definite grey, with a sharp dividing line between the position in the developer and that out of it. The whole sheet was then immersed and the time noted. Development was continued until the whole sheet was so black that the dividing line disappeared completely. The time was again noted and this time was that required to obtain the maximum depth of tone. Twenty-five per cent, was added to this to provide a margin of safety and this time was the time for development at the particular temperature.

TEST STRIPS USED
A test strip was then made, giving a series of exposures, each one double the last - two, four, eight, 16 seconds and so on, an extra portion of the test strip being covered up at the appropriate time. The test strip was then developed for the time already determined, fixed and examined. Opinion was divided as to whether eight or 16 seconds produced the best result, so a print was made with an exposure of 12 seconds and development carried out for exactly the same time as the test strip. The appearance by the safe-light did not matter, as absolute reliance could be placed on the method.

If the result is not satisfactory by this method, the worker can be certain that no print of better quality can be produced with that grade of paper. Actually, if the test strip appears satisfactory, the print will do so too. so the need for a different grade of paper will be discovered before any more is wasted. If a print proved too heavy and dark in the shadows, a lighter print can be made by reducing the time in the developer somewhat, but the quality suiters and the color of the print is a dingy black, rather than the rich black given by Mr. Berney's method. This color may be improved and a lighter print of good quality obtained, by bleaching the fixed and washed print in an ordinary sepia toning bleacher, washing thoroughly and re-developing for the full time in the normal developer. This does not intensify the print, but simply gives it good color, which gives a print its quality.

SOCIETY EXPANDING
Mr. Berney brought with him a number of prints to illustrate his talk and gave many useful hints to the members of the Newcastle Photographic Society.

Newcastle Photographic Society is steadily growing and will welcome photographers at its meetings. A series of classes for beginners is being held. This week the meeting was devoted to details concerning the correct exposure of negatives and the use of meters and calculators to determine a satisfactory exposure.

Any amateur interested may obtain full particulars from Mr. Geoff. Garside of Kodaks, Wolfe-street, Newcastle. The Newcastle Photographic Society's rooms are at the corner of Hunter and Auckland-streets. Newcastle.



August 1940  Page 376 - Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY

W.H. McCLUNG
1/250 sec. at f/4.5 on Kodak Verichrome Film
First Prizewinner in the Senior Set Subject (Speed and Action)
AUSTRALASIAN PHOTO-REVIEW

Tuesday 20th August 1940  Page 5 - The Cessnock Eagle and South Maitland Recorder (NSW)

OUTING AT LOCHEND - NEWCASTLE-CESSNOCK CAMERA SOCIETIES
Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society and Cessnock Photographic Society will unite in the organization of an informal outing at Lochend, the property of Mr. G. Maher, near Maitland, on Sunday. Cessnock members traveling by rail should leave the train at Victoria-street station and follow the street by that name to its junction in Mount Vincent-road. The property is just more than one mile distant from the station. A picnic lunch will be held.



Saturday 24th August 1940  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
One fascinating process of photography is the making of paper negatives and the whole subject was covered by Mr. J.H. Houghton in a lecture and demonstration to members of Newcastle Photographic Society. He showed the unexpected ease of handling this process and outlined the means of avoiding possible difficulties.

Mr. Houghton began by explaining the reason for making paper negatives. It often happens that a negative really requires some retouching or there is obtrusive detail which detracts from the pictorial value of the print. Not everyone possesses the skill to carry out the necessary modifications, but the paper negative makes the whole procedure easy, though not particularly rapid.

In one sample he exhibited there was a pleasant sunlit scene on the banks of a creek, but splashes of sunlight were everywhere and there was no definite centre of interest. If only the background and water had been sunlit, a very pleasant study would have been there. In the control work, it is easy to add density anywhere, but it is difficult to remove or lighten the image. Since paper negative work requires both a paper positive and paper negative before the final print can be made, it is possible to make any portion either dark by darkening the paper positive, or light by darkening the paper negative. The first step is to make the paper positive and this should be done on single weight paper, though double weight can be used. A smooth or glossy surface is desirable both for this and the paper negative.

EFFECTS OF CONTRAST
It is undesirable to use too contrasting a paper, as the whole process builds up contrast and a soft effect is aimed at throughout. The negative is placed in the enlarger and a test strip is made on bromide paper, giving two or three times the exposure that would be given for a normal print.

Development is carried out in a normal paper developer. The strip is fixed and examined by looking through it at a bright light. There must be a considerable deposit in the highlights and the whole must not look too contrasting. Looked at normally, the strip looks hopeless.

Having chosen the exposure, a print is made in the normal way and developed like the test strip, then fixed, washed and dried. It is absolutely essential that the paper be handled carefully and not kinked, as this will cause fuzzy patches. The print is flattened by placing it face downwards on a table and placing the back of a ruler firmly across the middle of it.

One end of the print is then lifted up from the table and held tightly, while the ruler is slid towards the other end, when it finally slides off the print. This is repeated in various directions until the print is flattened, or has a backward curve.

WORKING ON PRINT
The print is placed on a sheet of glass with a light under it and examined. Highlights can be toned down and any desired portions of the print darkened by working on the back with a soft pencil for detailed work, or powdered pencil lead on cotton wool for broad effects. At this stage portions that require darkening are attended to and the effect is seen by looking through the print.

When this stage is complete, the paper negative is made by contact on another piece of bromide paper. Several layers of blotting paper are placed on a flat surface and the test piece face upwards on top of these. The paper positive is placed face downwards on top of this and a heavy sheet of at least quarter-inch plate glass placed on top to give perfect contact. Various exposures are given, say one, two and four minutes, at four feet from a 60-watt globe. The test strip is developed and examined as before and a paper negative made.

The paper negative should be highly dense and not too contrasty. It is dried and flattened like the positive. If there are any fuzzy patches it means that the paper was not flattened properly, or that the pressure of the glass was not enough.

EXERCISING CONTROL
More control can now be exercised on the paper negative, working on the back by transmitted light. This time the addition of pencil will lighten the portions of the final print and highlights may be emphasized. It is generally desirable to do as little as is necessary at this stage.

The final print can now be made on any kind of paper. The same procedure is followed as for making the paper negative, but the test strip is examined in the normal way to find the correct exposure for the paper. The final print shown by Mr. Houghton was very different from the straight print. Without losing photographic quality. Interest and atmosphere was given to what was almost an impossible subject for pictorial work.

MAITLAND OUTING
Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society and the Cessnock Photographic Society will unite in an outing which will be held on Sunday on the property of Mr. G. Maher at Lochend, near Maitland. Variety in farm lands and undulating grazing property will provide interesting material for camera users. Newcastle members will travel by the 8.50am train from Newcastle and will leave it at Victoria Street station.



Friday 6th September 1940  Page 4 - The Cessnock Eagle and South Maitland Recorder (NSW)

LEADING PICTORIALISTS TO VISIT NORTH - CAMERA SOCIETY OUTING
Members of the Cessnock Photographic Society have been invited to join with members of the Newcastle Photographic Society in the entertainment of amateur photographers who will visit the north from Sydney at the weekend.

Included in the visitors will be Messrs. A.H. Jones and J.W. Metcalfe, who have gained a reputation throughout Australia for their salon pictorial work.

Photographic topics will be discussed and a print criticism will be held at the Newcastle Photographic Society's rooms on Saturday night. Arrangements will then be completed for the holding of an outing in the Dora Creek district on Sunday.

Members of the Cessnock Photographic Society available for the outing should contact their Hon.Secretary (Mr. W.H. McClung).



Tuesday 17th September 1940  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

PHOTOGRAPHIC OUTING AT BRUNKERVILLE
The Brunkerville district has been chosen by Newcastle Photographic Society for its outing on Sunday next. Members of the Cessnock Photographic Society have been invited to make the outing a combined meeting of the clubs.

The Newcastle party will visit points of interest on the way to Brunkerville and expect to arrive at the center at 2pm.

Entries are now due for the Winter Photography competition being conducted by the Cessnock Photographic Society. The next competition, entries for which will be due at the Society's meeting on 6th October, has been restricted to portraiture in full sunlight.



Saturday 28th September 1940  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
Portraiture by artificial light was the subject of a lecture and demonstration to members of Newcastle Photographic Society by Mr. Newton Wells, who emphasized that a great deal of variety may be obtained by a study of lighting aspects. A proper understanding of the way in which lights work, makes it possible to produce portraits which are not only recognizable, but really worth looking at.

The main failures the amateur comes up against are either ugly shadows or flatness and lack of modeling. The final portrait should create the impression of roundness and solidity, which one experiences when looking directly at the human face. This may be obtained by the careful balancing of lights.

In making a photographic portrait, there are two main kinds of lights employed and both must be used. There must be a general flood of light which will shine into all the shadows and render the textures therein. This by itself will produce a flat and uninteresting effect, but it is very necessary, because the contrast in the negative is far greater than appears to the eye. A better indication is found with a focussing screen, but even then it is necessary to throw rather more light into the shadows than would appear desirable.

THE SECOND LIGHT
In order to overcome this flatness a second and stronger light is required to give modeling. This gives highlight and shadow on the face and it should come from the side. To give life and sparkle to the print, it is particularly good if it is so arranged, that in addition to the highlights on its own side of the face. It also just catches the cheek-bone on the other side. If it is so far around that it throws no light on the far side of the face, the result is dull, while if it is too close to the camera, there is too much light, causing an awkward shadow from the nose.

The position of this modeling light is important. If it is high up. the effect is to make the face appear thinner, while of it is lower down, the appearance is plumper. This effect is obtained by cutting out or emphasizing the hollows under the cheek-bones, so that for a thin sitter, a low light is wanted, with the reverse for a person who would look better with a thinner face.

BACKGROUND IMPORTANT
The question of background is important and a plain background is generally desirable. This cannot be managed always in the home, but much may be accomplished by lighting the sitter strongly, leaving relatively little light on the background.

When the sitter is too close to the background, the shadow of the subject may be thrown upon it in an undesirable way. The greater the distance between the two, the less this is likely to happen, so it is a good plan to work somewhere where there is plenty of room in which to manoeuvre. Mr. Wells emphasized the need for care in developing to make sure that a sufficiently full exposure is given and to develop so as to obtain a fairly soft negative. A contrasty negative makes it difficult to obtain a satisfactory print. Orthochromatic or preferably panchromatic stock is the best material.

ANNUAL EXHIBITION
The Society's next lecturer is Mr. E.C. Sara, one of its own members, who will give a talk and demonstration on bromoil. One of Mr. E.C. Sara's own bromoils was chosen by Mr. Will Ashton as one of the nine best prints at the Photographic Society of New South Wales's annual exhibition, which will be open shortly to the public in Sydney. A number of prints by members of the Newcastle Photographic Society are being hung and it is hoped that the exhibition may be shown in Newcastle at a later date.



Saturday 25th January 1941  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The meeting night of the Newcastle Photographic Society for next week has been altered to Wednesday 29th January. This was done because of Australia Day holiday on Monday 27th January.

The lecture will be delivered by Mr. D. Cameron, who will demonstrate short cuts in Photography. Mr. Cameron intends to expose a film, develop same, enlarge and deliver the print within one hour.

This meeting will be the first one for the new year and intending members should write to the Hon.Secretary, Mr. E.C. Sinclair, or Mr. G. Garside, c/o. Kodak Ltd.

The society has a very complete club room and a very well equipped dark room for the use of members, which is situated at 425 Hunter-street, Newcastle.



Saturday 4th February 1941  Page 1 - The Cessnock Eagle and South Maitland Recorder (NSW)

CAMERA CLUB LOOKS TO ST. ALBAN'S WEEK-END OUTING
Members of the Cessnock Photographic Society are planning a week-end outing to be held at St. Alban's on 15th and 16th March. The move, which was discussed at the meeting of the Society on Sunday night, followed the success of a weekend outing held at the mouth of the Hawkesbury River a week ago. Three members of the Cessnock Photographic Society attended. Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society are being invited to join in the St. Alban's outing.



Saturday 15th February 1941  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
Desensitization and the development of 35mm films, were the subjects dealt with by Messrs. G. Garside and C. Shipway at the last meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society.

Desensitization is a very interesting process and one which is seldom used. It consists of reducing the sensitivity of the film by using very, strong dyes, such as pinocryptol green. When the film is placed in this solution for about two minutes, the sensitivity is reduced to approximately 1/1500th of its normal speed, without interfering in any way with the latent image. This enables the film to be developed by inspection in almost any subdued light except red. Even the light of a candle 8 to 10 feet away will not affect the latest panchromatic emulsions.

The beginner need not have the slightest hesitation in handling pan. film. It removes the doubt of the amateur whether the film is fully developed, as is the case when he must develop in complete darkness.

By desensitizing he may develop his films to any degree by inspection and work in the comfort of reasonable light. There are several chemical preparations available, such as Johnson's desensitol and B.W. tablets. When these solutions are made up, they are quite stable and can be stored in a dark bottle and used many times.

Mr. Randle projected a number of 35mm Kodachrome transparencies, which showed fine color rendition and were voted as some of the best yet seen by members.

Mr. D. Cameron explained and demonstrated short cuts in photography with regard to exposing, developing, enlarging and drying the print.

He used a process cut film. This was placed in the back of the camera, exposed and developed in D72 undiluted. The development was very rapid. The film was fixed in hypo, rinsed in water and placed between two pieces of glass and enlarged wet. The print was then developed, fixed and washed for a few minutes. After this, several changes of water and methylated spirit were used to expel the water from the enlargement. The dried print was completed in under 25 minutes.

The next meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society will be on 24th February, when a print criticism night will be held. Members are requested to take along prints for the purpose. The monthly competition closes that night.

Any photographers in the district who desire to improve their knowledge, or those who wish to have the use of a well-equipped darkroom, should write to the Hon.Secretary. Mr. E.C. Sinclair, Box 18, Newcastle, or to Mr. G. Garside, at Kodaks. The society's rooms are at 425 Hunter Street, Newcastle and meeting nights are on the second and fourth Mondays of each month. The darkroom is available at any time.



Saturday 22nd February 1941  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
Print criticism will form the subject for discussion at the next meeting of Newcastle Photographic Society, which will be held in the club rooms, 425 Hunter-street, Newcastle, on 24th February.

As this is a most important subject for any photographer who wants to improve his work, members should have an instructive night and it is hoped that many prints will be brought along to form the basis of discussion.

The society has been fortunate in securing a series of photographs by the well-known American pictorialist, Ansel Adams. These photographs will be on exhibition at this meeting only and will give members the opportunity of examining at first hand work which hitherto they have had to admire in the pages of photographic Journals.

For any information concerning the activities of the Newcastle Photographic Society, a letter to the Hon.Secretary (Mr. E.A. Sinclair).



Saturday 15th March 1941  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society have had a good opportunity of seeing 14 selected enlargements, the work of the well-known American photographer. Ansel Adams. The work of this photographer is very outstanding in many respects, the most impressive point being the extreme sharpness and detail in all his photographs, even down to the portraits. The tonal range of the prints was another point of which members took exceptional note and all the enlargements were made in glossy paper.

Some of the technical details as used by Ansel Adams were described and a K1 or K2 filter orthochromatic material and a lens stop of f64 or even smaller were used in nearly all cases. Ansel Adams could certainly be called a purist, as all the prints were straight; that is, no other photographic process used except ordinary bromide enlargements.

The members were so pleased with these prints that the competition for this month will be an endeavor to portray some of Ansel Adams's skill and technique.

The next meeting will be held on Monday 24th March. when a photographic quiz will be held. This will be something new to the society and should prove to be most instructive to members, as well as entertaining. Some very interesting evenings are now being held on the second and fourth Mondays of each month and anybody interested should write to the Hon.Secretary, E.C. Sinclair, or the president, G. Garside. c/o. Kodak Ltd. The Newcastle Photographic Society is very interested in obtaining new members and assistance will be given to beginners in photography.



Saturday 22nd March 1941  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The Soviet Foreign Office demonstrated to foreign diplomats and correspondents a new stereoscopic motion picture machine which, its inventor claimed, adds a third dimension — depth — to the movies.

The youthful inventor, Semyon Ivanoff, presented seven experimental short films, including a color scene of a fancy dress ball which, he said, "combined all the most modern developments of the cinema — motion, sound, color and depth".

He said the essential element of his apparatus was a six-ton perspective grill or transparent screen of 30,000 closely spaced wires having a total length of nearly 100 miles. This grill was placed in front of the usual movie screen.

Double films, taken from slightly different angles, were cast on the screen and with two mirrors, reflected back through the grill to the spectator, providing a separate image for each eye.

Third dimensional or depth effects in motion pictures have been achieved for several years in Hollywood, notably in "Snow White and the Seven Dwarfs" and the recently released "Fantasia".



Saturday 19th April 1941  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

Intensification and reduction of negatives was the subject chosen by Mr. A.T. Ullman at the last meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society.

Mercuric chloride was the method used for intensification and the negative chosen for the demonstration was so thin that it was impossible to make a satisfactory print on the most contrasty paper. After treatment in mercuric chloride, however, the negative could easily be printed on a normal or medium grade printing paper.

Reduction was then demonstrated with success by the use of the well known Farmer's Reducer. Negatives to be reduced were so dense that printing was almost impossible. When treated they were of average density.

Coming lectures to the society include lantern slides, by Mr. Nicholls, of Waratah; microscopic photography, by Mr. Hamilton (Sydney) and a talk by Mr. Paul Home, of Kodak's. Invitations to attend are extended to all photographers, including members of Newcastle North Camera Club and the Cessnock Photographic Society. More details of these lectures will be available shortly.

The Council of the Newcastle Photographic Society early in May is instituting a beginners class twice a month. The subjects to be covered will be exposure, developing the film, contact printing and enlarging. This class will be open to all, not only society members. Those desiring to enrol are asked to write to the Hon.Secretary, Mr. E.C. Sinclair, Box 18, Newcastle, or to call at Kodak's Ltd., Wolfe Street, Newcastle. The classes are free to all.



Saturday 3rd May 1941  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
Members of the Newcastle Amateur Cine Society were enthusiastic in their praise of the lecture given by Mr. C.E. Sara at their fortnightlv meeting last Tuesday night. The subject chosen by Mr. E.C. Sara was composition, dealing with the fundamental principles in composing a picture. They are unity, harmony, contrast, repetition, rhythm, subordination, simplicity and balance.

The lecturer began with unity as the most important. Unity is of two classes, natural and artificial. Closely allied to unity is harmony which is the arrangement of parts in such a manner that they will form a pleasing whole and this may be considered to be of two kinds, negative and positive. Contrast is one of the most valuable aids possessed by the photographer as it helps to strengthen an otherwise weak composition, but should be used sparingly whether in line or in light. The repetition of the line or values of the principal object, either directly or with slight variation in the same key or a different one, serves to explain the principal object. Rhythm is allied to repetition but is not identical with it, being broader in its application.

Subordination is rather a quality than a principal and means simply that the detail, which is introduced to explain or give emphasis to the principal thought or object must not compete with this in interest. Simplicity is related to subordination as it means the elimination of all unnecessary detail and gradation keeping only that which is required to give clearness and vigor to the expression of the fundamental emotion of thought. Balance is the last of the fundamental principals which is to be considered and it is one of the most important, which deals with the placing of the principal object of the picture. Mr. E.C. Sara had Kodachrome slides projected by one of the members of the club in which these eight principals were detected and discussed by him.

NEWCASTLE SOCIETY
"Lantern slides, their making and their projection", was the subject chosen by the Rev. Mr. Nichols, of Waratah, at the Newcastle Photographic Society's meeting on Monday last. Mr. Nichols explained the method used for copying half tone prints in making the negatives prior to printing the lantern slide by projection. The slide was much easier to effect local shading and control when made in this way. He also explained to members that most of his equipment was home made, how he made it and the benefits gained, particularly with regard to the making device which gave the finished projected slide a very fine white line around the subject, which definitely set the slide off when seen on the screen.

As announced in this column on 19th April, the Newcastle Photographic Society is starting a beginners class on the third Monday in May. There will be no fee for this class and any person who has a camera and wants to learn something of the best way to use it will be very welcome, whether he has any intention of joining the society or not. The series of classes is based on the idea that it is easy to produce technically first-class negatives and prints providing a few elementary rules are put into practice.

It is expected that those attending will attempt to put into practice what is dealt with in these classes and definite suggestions will be made, starting with the care, use and the possibilities of the different types of cameras. The question of exposure, development of negatives and printing will be covered in turn. All of these will be demonstrated as far as possible in the dark room, but those attending will be asked to make exposures, develop and print them and bring along the results for inspection and criticism. Most of us know there are things we should do, but when it comes to making the prints, for example, we produce a couple of dozen in an evening and none of them really good. By deliberately setting out with one subject carrying it right through, alongside others and aiming throughout at technical perfection, more can be learned in a few evenings than in a year of pottering about.

That is the idea behind the classes. They will not be just a series of lectures: they are frankly to help the ordinary photographers to get better results. There will be six evenings in all in the first and third Mondays of the month at 8pm, commencing on Monday 21st May. The Newcastle Photographic Society will be pleased to have you come along and further details can be had by writing to the Hon.Secretary, Mr. E.C. Sinclair, Newcastle, or by calling at Kodak Ltd., 9 Wolfe-street, Newcastle.

On Monday, May 12, the Newcastle Photographic Society will have the pleasure of hearing a very competent lecturer in Mr. Paul Horne, of Kodak Ltd., Sydney, who will lecture on "Pictorial Composition". Mr. Horne will also show to the members some of his own works.



Monday 5th May 1941  Page 4 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

NEW FEATURES FOR MAY DAY
New features will be used in the celebration of May Day in Newcastle to-day. A big demonstration has been planned.

Twenty amateur photographers of the Newcastle Photographic Society will take photographs of the procession as it moves along Hunter-street. A special prize will be awarded for the best black and white picture. A movie film of the procession, crowning of queen ceremony and other events will be made. This will be shown at the May Day social to be held at the King's Birthday week-end and at meetings at the Lakeside and Coalfield towns. The film will be kept by Newcastle Trades Hall Council for record purposes.



Friday 9th May 1941  Page 3 - The Cessnock Eagle and South Maitland Recorder (NSW)

SYDNEY CAMERAMEN TO VISIT COALFIELDS - CESSNOCK CLUB WILL JOIN IN TOUR
The Coalfields district has attracted the attention of a group of Sydney photographers whose work places them among leading Australian contemporary pictoralists.

They are members of the Photographic Society of New South Wales who will spend the week-end in the north and on Sunday, will visit Brunkerville and the surrounding foothills of the mountain range between Kurri and Lake Macquarie.

In the party will be Messrs. Jones, Dirks and Metcalfe — names well known to pictorial photographers. The latter is the father of Jack Metcalfe, who, some years ago, represented Australia and achieved success at the Olympic Games.

The visitors will stay at Newcastle on Saturday night and at the rooms of the Newcastle Photographic Society, will conduct a print criticism and discuss photographic topics with members.

Members of the Cessnock Photographic Society have been invited to attend, the Newcastle discussion and join the visitors and Newcastle Photographic Society members on the outing at Brunkerville.

MAY ADDRESS MEETING
During the week-end efforts will be made to have one of the visitors, or a leading member of the Newcastle Photographic Society, address the meeting of Cessnock Photographic Society, which has been set down for Sunday night.

If the arrangement cannot be made, Cessnock members will be entertained at their Photographic Quiz which is being arranged by four club members.

Entries for the Society's competition in portraiture should be handed in at the meeting.



Saturday 10th May 1941  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

At the regular fortnightly meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society, members and visitors who are cordially invited to attend will hear a lecture on "Pictorial Composition" by Mr. Paul Home of Melbourne. Mr. Home is attached to the head office technical staff of Kodak (A/Asia) Pty. Ltd. and is particularly well versed and highly esteemed as a pictorial photographer in Victoria. He will also exhibit a portfolio of his own work which should be very much appreciated by those attending.



Saturday 17th May 1941  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
Amateur photographers will welcome the decision of the Newcastle Photographic Society to start a beginners class and the first session, on Monday 19th May, should be well attended.

The society has decided to make the class open to all who desire to improve their knowledge and the "scholars" will be given a good grounding in the whole subject of photography.

The classes will take the form of lectures and demonstrations and will extend over six alternate Monday nights. The subjects will be: (1) Various types of cameras, their usefulness and limitations. (2) Exposure, the method of calculating it, depth of focus and kindred subjects. (3) Development of negatives. (4) Making a contact print of good technical quality. (5) Enlarging and the use of bromide papers. (6) Choice of subject and placing it in the correct picture space.

The society is to be congratulated on this move and the classes should be well attended. There are hundreds of amateur photographers in the district who literally waste money on expensive material, turning out second class matter, when, with a little tuition, they could reach a high standard of efficiency at the same cost.

Those interested should get in touch with the Newcastle Photographic Society, Hon.Secretary, Mr. E.C. Sinclair, Box 18, P.O., Newcastle, or Mr. G. Garslde, at Kodak's, Wolfe street, Newcastle. If this is not convenient, they may go straight to the Newcastle Photographic Society's rooms at 425 Hunter-street, Newcastle on Monday night.

PICTORIAL COMPOSITION
Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society and their friends had the benefit at the last meeting of a lecture by Mr. Paul Horne, an interstate demonstrator attached to Kodak (A'asia) Pty. Ltd., Sydney.

Mr. Horne spoke on a subject of great interest to amateur photographers — pictorial composition and its relation to Australian landscapes. The impressions he conveyed to his hearers should be of great assistance to them in their future work.

Mr. Horne displayed a portfolio of his own work, including fine studies of Australian landscapes, trees and portraits. All his prints were of exhibition standard. Many members benefited from Mr. Horne's experience when they placed before him samples of their own work and received his technical advice and criticism.

During the week Mr. Horne gave a demonstration and lecture at Kodak's Wolfe-street store on amateur home portraiture by artificial light. It was very well attended.



Saturday 24th May 1941  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The big attendance at the first beginners class established by the Newcastle Photographic Society on Monday night is most encouraging and augurs well for the success of the complete series. The first lecturer was Mr. D.L Cameron, who explained to his class the object and methods proposed in instructing beginners. He followed this with a talk on the various types of cameras available, their use and limitations. Included was a pinhole camera, the simplest type possible, mode from a tin box.

Mr. Cameron, by means of charts, explained how depth of focus was obtained with different focal length lenses and went into great detail on many aspects of the subject. The next class will be held on Monday 2nd June and those interested are invited to the society's rooms at 425 Hunter Street, Newcastle, at 8pm.

Colored photography will be the subject chosen by Mr. Harrington of Sydney at the next full meeting of the society on Monday 26th May. Mr. Harrington is an authority on his subject and should prove very interesting. A cordial invitation to all to attend this talk is extended.

For the meeting on Monday 9th June, the society will have the privilege of hearing Mr. Hamilton of Sydney talking on one of the most difficult phases of the art, micro-photography. For the benefit of those amateurs who desire to join the society, particulars may be had from Mr. G. Garside, Kodak's, Wolfe Street, Newcastle or by writing to the Hon.Secretary, Mr. E.A. Sinclair.



Saturday 31st May 1941  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
Color photography was discussed from all angles at this week's meeting of Newcastle Photographic Society. The lecturer was Mr. H.R. Harrington, of the Sydney Technical College, who projected a fine collection of color slides, including Agfa processes abroad and films processed by the lecturer himself, as well as a series of Kodak Kodachrome slides.

The beginners class will meet again on Monday, when Mr. D.I. Cameron will be dealing with the subject of exposure and how to calculate it with out the use of a meter. Classes are held in the society's rooms at 425 Hunter Street, Newcastle, at 8pm and all are welcome.

A very good series of pictorial photographs by Mr. D. Boyd, of New Lambton. is on display at Kodaks Wolfe Street Store and the public is invited to view these pictures at any time.



Thursday 5th June 1941  Page 11 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

TALK ON MICROSCOPIC PHOTOGRAPHY
An outstanding lecture and demonstration entitled Movie-Making through the Microscope, is to be held at Central Hall, King Street, on Monday 9th June. The lecturer, Mr. W.E. Hamilton, of Sydney, enjoys a Commonwealth wide reputation for his macro and micro cinematographic work and his lecture has aroused the greatest interest whenever delivered.

A portfolio of about two dozen enlargements selected from Mr. Hamilton's high-and-low-power "still" microscopic work will also be on display at the same time.

While the lecture is primarily intended for photographic and micrographic enthusiasts members of the public will be welcome as seating accommodation permits. The visit has been organized by the Newcastle Photographic Society in association with the Lecture Service Division of Kodak (Australasia) Pty. Ltd.



Saturday 14th June 1941  Page 2 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The ordinary human being generally fights shy of scientific lectures as dry-as-dust entertainments fit only for those persons who are interested in that sort of thing, but the lecture and demonstration given this week by Mr. W.E. Hamilton in Newcastle would have held the interest of the most flighty jitterbug. And it was about bugs and other creeping things that Mr. Hamilton talked, though he disguised his subject under the fearsome title of macro and micro - cinematography, or, simply, movie-making through a microscope. A man of winning personality, with an infinite capacity for most unscientific "wise-cracking", the lecturer kept a very large audience enthralled at the Central Hall. He enjoys a Commonwealth-wide reputation for his work in this direction and his services were made available by the lecture service division of Kodak (Australasia) Pty. Ltd., through the good offices of the Newcastle Photographic Society. His film, Public Enemy No. 1, depicting the life of the house-fly, deserves a place in the archives of every municipal and shire council, for frequent showings to the general public. Copies have already been purchased by many organizations, including the New South Wales Department of Public Health, the Tasmanian Government and a film service in Germany. The Queensland Government has also indicated its interest, Mr. Hamilton revealed.

BELIEVE IT OR NOT
From a photographic point of view, Mr. Hamilton's movie work in color and straight black-and-white left nothing to be desired. From a scientific point of view it was equally outstanding. One of his films, which he titled, Believe It Or Not, contained some almost unbelievable shots. It was straight going when he showed the inside of a bag of spider's eggs and traced the lives of the young spiders until they were ready to fend for themselves. It was also straight going when he showed a spinning silkworm and mentioned that it took this caterpillar 72 hours to spin a cocoon, during which operation it swayed its head 250,000 times: but when he started to photographically analyze other things, it gave the audience food for thought - and also the thought that in future they would "lay off" certain foods. For instance, he showed, under the microscope, some cheap vinegar which had been left standing for some months. It was a mass of crawling things which he called "vinegar eels" and which finished up knitting themselves into the scum which one sees on standing vinegar. A thing that looked like a mechanized nightmare. Mr. Hamilton assured the audience was a minute "wog" which came from cheese. Naturalists classified it, he said, as a sort of spider.

THE MORNING AFTER
Revelers who go on a spree and wake up next morning tasting a mixture of lime, barbed wire and boxing gloves stewed in cold tea, would have shrunk from the crawling mass of bacteria flung on to the screen by Mr. Hamilton. "That", he said tersely, "is the nasty taste you wake up in the morning with", adding that a hundred million of these bacteria would not weigh a grain. Passing on from these severely scientific matters, the speaker showed what could be done with a camera, a microscope and a packet of ordinary worm powder. Photographing these grains by means of polarized light, produced a riotous mass of color, dazzling to the eye and almost unbelievable in its beauty. Without polarized light, he explained, the color would have been missing completely. Another interesting film showed life in a pond, aquarium and fighting fish in color, insect life and as a piece de-resistance, the circulating blood in the foot of a frog. A rare shot showed a pin-waisted sand wasp at work, digging a hole to lay its eggs. Mr. Hamilton admitted that infinite patience was essential in micro-cinematographic work and his audience believed him. After the lecture and demonstration, a vote of thanks was accorded Mr. Hamilton by the President of Newcastle Photographic Society (Mr. G. Garside) and other officials. Messrs. Cameron and Sinclair.

BEGINNERS CLASSES
Owing to the public holiday on Monday, Newcastle Photographic Society's beginners class will be held on Tuesday night. The subject will be development of roll films. Intending new members are asked to attend the society's rooms at the corner of Hunter and Auckland streets. All are welcome.

NEWCASTLE NORTH CLUB
The next meeting of the Newcastle North Camera Club will be held on 25th June. Monthly competition results must be finalized on this date so that the annual presentation of trophies can take place at the club's "smoko" to be held on 7th July. As this is a holiday week-end no outing has been arranged but a weekend trip to Barrington Tops has been arranged for the near future. Those members intending to take this trip should get in touch with the club Hon.Secretary, Mr. T. Parkinson. The Hon.Secretary reported a letter of appreciation from the organizer of the Y.M.C.A. regarding the club's cooperation in the "Snapshots from Home League" effort. A vote of appreciation was also recorded for the invitation, from the Newcastle Photographic Society, for members of the Newcastle North Camera Club to attend recent lectures given by members of the Royal Photographic Society lecturing at Newcastle.



July 1941  Page 247 - The Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY

"AUSTRALIAN SYMPHONY"
W.H. McCLUNG
Third Prizewinner in the Senior "Signs of Spring" Contest
Australasian Photo-Review
1/50 sec. at f/8 on “S.S. Pan" Film, Light Yellow Filter

Saturday 12th July 1941  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
The next meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society will be held at the club room on 14th July, at 8pm. The lecturer will be Mr. J. Werney, of Sydney, who will deal with "A Rational System of Exposure Determination". The lecture will be illustrated and this coupled with Mr. Berney's ability to deal with matters pertaining to photography, should make it well worth hearing. The council is still desirous of obtaining prints from members for the decoration of the club-room walls.



Saturday 30th August 1941  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

CAMERA CRAFT
NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
"Local Reduction" on bromide prints was the subject chosen by Mr. D.I. Cameron for his lecture to members of the society this week. Mr. Cameron demonstrated the very many uses for potassium ferricynide-hypo, viz., farmer's reducer, in cleaning up prints generally, accentuating highlights and removing spots and unwanted portions of prints. The method used is to make up a 20 percent, hypo solution, to which is added a few drops on 10 per cent. potassium ferricynide solution, which should bring the solution to a pale yellow green color. The print is soaked thoroughly in clean water. Remove surplus water and swab the print carefully with the ferricynide solution and wash at once; repeat until the required reduction is obtained. Remember to take the reduction in very slight stages.

The beginners' class will take place on Monday and those who have previously attended are asked to complete the series of lectures.



Tuesday 28th October 1941  Page 3 - The Cessnock Eagle and South Maitland Recorder (NSW)

Mr. Charles Raisbeck was the guest speaker last night at the meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society. He discussed the control of light and shade in the making of a picture.



Tuesday 5th December 1941  Page 16 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

COUNCIL CANDIDATES
Mr. A.J. REEDMAN (Citizens, Central) is a son of J.C. Reedman, former South Australian and Test cricketer. He came to Newcastle from South Australia 20 years aso. Well known in building circles, Mr. Reedman is the proprietor of the Home Builders Plan Service and has prepared plans of hundreds of homes erected in the Newcastle district. He is actively interested in philanthropic work as the Hon.Secretary and superintendent of the Newcastle City Mission. He is a member of the Business Men's Club and the Newcastle Photographic Society. Mr. Reedman is teaming with Alderman Richardson and Mr. A.S. Nathan.



Saturday 17th January 1942
Page 3 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)
Page 2 and 5 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

RED CROSS EXHIBITION
Photographers should make a point of visiting the Annual Exhibition for 1941 of the Photographic Society of New South Wales, at David Jones's showrooms, Newcastle, next week. The exhibition, which comprises 200 prints on loan to the Newcastle Photographic Society. Is in aid of Red Cross funds. It opens on Monday and runs until Friday. The prints, which are by well-known Sydney and Newcastle photographers, including Cazneaux, Mallard, Metcalfe, Wray, Bourke, Horne; cover almost every subject and will be an object lesson to amateur cameramen and a decided attraction for the general public.



June 1944  Page 160 - Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
On 10th April, Mr. J. Porteous gave an interesting talk on exposure meters. Many types of meters were brought to the meeting and some interesting comparisons were made. As an introduction to his subject, the lecturer spoke at some length on the subject of exposure, which he ably demonstrated by means of characteristic curves. A print criticism was later conducted by the Hon.Secretary, Mr. A.J. Reedman. The President, Mr. A.E. Brown, gave a short talk on 24th April, on the types of negatives suitable for composite printing. Following his talk, the President gave a demonstration of the method he employs when “printing-in” clouds. The meeting closed with a criticism of a group of prints by Messrs. A.E. Brown, A.J. Reedman, C. Collins, T. Ullman, J. Porteous and C. Hughes. The prints exhibited were of a high standard and the criticisms proved very helpful.



1st July 1944  Page 194 - Vol. 51 No. 7 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
On 8th May, Mr. D. Cameron gave an interesting lecture on focusing, which was ably supported by prints illustrating the varying sharpness at different stop openings. At the meeting held on 22nd May, Mr. B. Hall dealt with solarisation. The subject was a new one to many who attended and the matter was dealt with by Mr. Hall in such an interesting manner that these present were able to add a store of information to their photographic knowledge.



1st August 1944  Page 242 - Vol. 51 No. 8 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The subject of paper negatives was discussed on 10th June. The speaker outlined the method employed and demonstrated the various stages and the almost unlimited control available.

On the 24th June, Mr. J. Porteous gave an interesting address on “Lenses”. The rest of the evening was devoted to a criticism of 32 prints which members had prepared for entry in the Adelaide Camera Club Ninth Annual Exhibition, Lieutenant C. Sara and Mr. D. Cameron lead the print discussion and complimented members on having produced such a fine array of prints.



Monday 20th November 1944  Page 6 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

LESS THAN FORTNIGHT TO CITY ELECTION
Mr. A.J. Reedman is Hon.Secretary of the Newcastle City Mission, Hon.Secretary of the Newcastle Photographic Society and a member of the committee of the Road Safety Council. He is the proprietor of the Home Builders Plan Service and also May and E. Boddy's photographic studios. In the past 10 years, as proprietor of the Home Builders Plan Service, he has prepared the plans for about half the homes built in the district.



Thursday 14th December 1944  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

BUSINESS CLUB'S NEW PRESIDENT
Mr. A.E. Brown was unanimously elected President of Newcastle Business Men's Club yesterday. He had been Vice-President.

Mr. Brown came to Newcastle six years ago to establish a branch of Cox Bros., clothing and furniture providers. He also set up branches in the country and returned to Newcastle to take the position of general manager, which he still occupies. He joined the firm in Melbourne 18 years ago, was five years in Adelaide and had been two years in Tasmania before transferring to Newcastle.

Mr. and Mrs Brown have two sons at Newcastle High School. The elder boy hopes to enter Sydney University next year to continue his studies in the Faculty of Science.

Mr. Brown is a councilor of Newcastle Retail Traders Association and PRESIDENT of Newcastle Photographic Society. Photography is his particular hobby. For recreation, he has an occasional round of golf.



1st January 1945  Page 6 - Vol. 52 No. 1 vAustralasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
At the meeting on 13th November the President Mr. A.E. Brown, gave an address on Flower Portraiture. This was followed by a discussion of a large number of original prizewinning prints published in the A.P.-R. The action of Kodak Ltd., Newcastle, in making available these prints to the Society for exhibition was greatly appreciated by members who were unanimous in their praise of the quality of the work. A vote of thanks was carried unanimously for the opportunity of viewing such a large number of high quality prints, this action being regarded by members as a definite source of encouragement to them in their work.



Tuesday 24th April 1945  Page 6 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

A meeting of the Newcastle Art Society and Newcastle Photographic Society was held recently in the City Hall to elect officers to represent them at C.E.M.A. and to discuss the July festival. Messrs. Turner and Hill were appointed delegates and Mr. Ninness, President.



1st June 1945  Page 252 - Vol. 52 No. 6 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
“Artificial versus Outdoor Lighting for Portraiture”, was the subject debated on April 9.

Don Cameron, for natural lighting, claimed that out-of-doors photography presented variety in lighting effects combined with an intensity beyond the scope of artificial lighting. There was a wider range of background material and consequently improved facilities for the harmonizing of subject and surroundings.

Eric Morris, for Artificial Lighting, emphasized the ease of control of lighting effects and the certainty of obtaining consistent results. The speed of modern panchromatic films had, he said, removed the last disadvantage of artificial lighting.

The group voted in favor of natural lighting. Speaker at the April 23 meeting of the Society was W.H. McClung, who discussed Pictorial Control after Enlarging. The talk dealt with the control of gradation and contrast range, elimination of unwanted features and introduction of others designed to improve the picture. It detailed means of local and general reduction by the action of potassium ferricyanide, and the control over tones given by the abrasion tone and oil processes. Photographs and equipment were shown to illustrate the address.

Prints entered by members in the Photographic Society of New South Wales’s recent exhibition were displayed at Kodak’s Newcastle Branch. The Society has started a series of print and criticism exchanges with the Wollongong Camera Club.



1st July 1945  Page 300 - Vol. 52 No. 7 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Newcastle’s biggest photographic audience heard a review of the latest developments in color photography by Mr. Eric Merton, of Kodak’s technical staff.

Mr. Merton outlined color-printing methods and indicated the trend in the field and advantage of the use of the pola screen was explained. The address was illustrated by color prints and equipment.

The audience was shown two Kodachrome movies — one taken in the Dandenong Ranges by Mr. Merton, the other telling the story of a sailing ship as seen by the camera of Mr. C.A. Piggott, press photographer, of Newcastle.

For their second May meeting, members of the Society criticized a portfolio of prints from the Wollongong Camera Club. The criticism of members of the South Coast club on prints sent recently from Newcastle was read.



1st August 1945  Page 381 - Vol. 52 No. 8 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
A knowledge of composition was developed subconsciously, said Mr. C. Collin, in a talk on the subject at the June meeting of Newcastle Photographic Society.

He said that, after an effort to apply the principles of composition, much could be gained by a submission of the print to criticism. Photographic societies and the A.P.-R. competitions afforded such an opportunity for print criticism. Many award-winning prints were produced through modification on the lines suggested by comment.

If self-criticism was to be applied, the amateur photographer should endeavor to “live” with his print for a week. He should place it in some position where he could see it daily. If, at the end of the week, the print still had his approval, then it was ready for submission to higher authority.

The President (Mr. J. Porteus) provided the program for the July meetings.

Discussing lenses, he detailed the abberations and correction methods adopted in their manufacture. In his second discussion he dealt with film development and gave a practical demonstration in the Society’s darkroom. The demonstration was the first of a series designed to assist new members.

The Society will co-operate in the organization of the Newcastle CEMA exhibition from 25th August till 1st September.



1st October 1945  Page 434 - Vol. 52 No. 10 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Seventy-five prints were shown at the House Exhibition of the Newcastle Photographic Society on September 10. Awards by popular vote were; Landscape, Seascape or Tree: T. Ullman (2) and J. Porteus equal. Portraiture: A.J. Reedman and W.H. McClung equal. Other subjects; C. Collins 1; J. Porteus and C. Collins equal 2. Other meetings of the Society were addressed by Messrs. J. Porteus and W.H. McClung. Mr. Porteus gave a demonstration on enlarging and Mr. McClung discussed methods of control in enlarging and photomontage. The Society is planning a three-months course of instruction for beginners. The class will start in February, the fee being 5/-.

One hundred and three prints by members of the Newcastle Photographic Society and Newcastle North Societies were shown at the Newcastle C.E.M.A. Art Exhibition.

Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society were alternately cameramen and models when a portraiture night was conducted at the first October meeting. Using the Society’s equipment, the President (Mr. J. Porteus) demonstrated principles of portrait lighting and the use of backgrounds.

A practical demonstration of sepia toning was given at the previous meeting by the Society’s Hon.Secretary, Mr. T. Ullman. With sodium sulphide as the toner, he showed the effects of bleaching with potassium ferricyanide, potassium permanganate and potassium bichromate.

The Club’s first outing since the imposition of photographic restrictions was held on the coast between Belmont and Swansea.



November - December 1945  Page 480 - Vol. 52 No. 11 and 12 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The wide range of control offered by the bromoil process in the hands of experts was emphasized by Mr. E.C. Sara, in an address to members of the Newcastle Photographic Society at its second November meeting. He illustrated his talk with the equipment used and a comparison of straight and bromoil prints.

At the previous meeting, held at the studio of Mr. Hilton Wilkinson, Mr. Wilkinson demonstrated the Mortensen technique. He told members that absolute adherence to the technique was necessary to get the full range of tone values from a minimum exposure and full development.

Competitions resulted:
OUTING: H.M. Rice, 1; A. Reedman, 2; A.T. Ullman, 3.
PORTRAITURE: C. Collins, 1.



Tuesday 27th November 1945  Page 4 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

Mr. W.E.C. Sara, well-known Australian photographer gave a lecture on "Bromoil and Pictorialism" to Newcastle Photographic Society last night. The meeting, at the club rooms in Hunter-street, was largely attended by Newcastle's amateur photographers.



Thursday 17th January 1946  Page 4 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

WARRANT OFFICER COLIN BURGESS - DIES IN SYDNEY
Warrant Officer Colin Burgess, 28, second son of Mr. and Mrs W.A. Burgess, of Mayfield East, died in Sydney last night. His widow and baby daughter live in Clovelly. Colin Burgess, who had been ill for a fortnight, had been in the "Royal Australian Air Force" since April 1940 and had served in the Middle East and New Guinea. He returned from the North on 22nd December. He was born at Singleton, but came to Mayfield when two. He was educated at the Mayfield East School and Newcastle High School. He was in the B.H.P. office staff when he enlisted and was a member of the Newcastle Rostrum Club and Newcastle Photographic Society. His wife, who was Miss Florence Alam, served in the "Women's Auxiliary Australian Air Force" for three years.



Tuesday 22nd January 1946  Page 6 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

The Newcastle Photographic Society, at its Annual General Meeting last night, elected the following officials: President, Mr. W.H. McClung; Vice-president, Mr. J. Porteous; Hon.Treasurer, Mr. R.N. Winn; Hon.Secretary, Mr. T. Ullman; Committee, Messrs. C. Collin, E.C. Sara, H.M. Rice, Miss H.V. Robinson.

It was decided to hold an outing to the waterfront on 10th February. Prints of the North Stockton outing will be judged at a meeting on 11th February.



1st February 1946  Page 58 - Vol. 53 No. 2 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
While the Society, like all others, experienced difficulties in the war years, its membership was already rising to pre-war strength, the retiring President (Mr. J. Porteous) told members in his annual report.

Sixteen members joined during 1945. Members who gave addresses and demonstrations were Messrs. Porteous, McClung, Ullman, Cameron, Sara, Hall, Morris and Hughes.

Members had prints exhibited at the Toledo (U.S.A.), Adelaide, Portland and Wollongong salons.

The Society affiliated with C.E.M.A., and, in conjunction with Newcastle North Camera Club, successfully organized the photographic section of the Council’s art exhibition.

Officers elected at the annual meeting were; President, W.H. McClung; Vice-President, J. Porteous; Hon.Secretary, T. Ullman; Treasurer, R.N. Winn; Committee, Messrs. C. Collin, E.C. Sara, H.M. Rice and Miss H.V. Robinson.

The first lecture in the course for novices was given at the Society’s club rooms, 425 Hunter Street, on February 25. A series of six fortnightly lecture demonstrations will be given for the course fee of 5/-. Application forms are available at Kodak’s Newcastle Branch.



Monday 25th February 1946  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)
Tuesday 26th February 1946  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

ADDRESS ON HUMOR IN PHOTOGRAPHY
"Photographic Humor" will be the subject of an address to be given by Mr. Keast Burke, Associate Editor of the Australian Photographic Review, to Newcastle Photographic Society tomorrow night.

Mr. Keast Burke will be in Maitland tomorrow to judge photographic exhibits in the Maitland Show.

Members of the public who are interested in photography are invited to attend the meeting tomorrow night at 8pm in the society's rooms at 425 Hunter Street, Newcastle.

Enrollments will be taken at the meeting for a beginners class in photography. A series of fortnightly lectures, extending over a period of three months, will be given, with demonstrations, by members of the society. The lectures will be given immediately before the Newcastle Photographic Society's regular meetings and beginners may remain for the meetings.



Wednesday 27th February 1946  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

BEGINNERS CLASS IN PHOTOGRAPHY
Starting on 11th March, a series of six fortnightly lectures will be given for members of the new beginners class in photography sponsored by Newcastle Photographic Society.

Last night the society was addressed on "Photographic Humor" by Mr. Keast Burke, Associate Editor of the Australian Photographic Review. He outlined the humor depicted in photographs from the Victoria era when parody was most popular. Modern parody was more sophisticated and less obvious, as shown by many amusing slides screened during the address. The lecturer will judge photographic exhibits at the Maitland Show to-day.



1st March 1946  Page 146 - Vol. 53 No. 3 The Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The pitfalls, problems and domestic complications so well-known to every amateur photographer provided material for the address by the Associate Editor of the A.P.-R. (Mr. Keast Burke) to members of the Newcastle Photographic Society. He quoted from the humorists who, from the early days of the art, have expressed the lighter side of photography. The talk was illustrated with numerous lantern slides depicting the work of typical overseas cartoonists.

In his presidential address to the Society on March 11, Mr. W. McClung discussed the time factor in photography. The first lecture in a course for beginners was given at the meeting.

Awards in outing competitions resulted:
North Stockton: C. Collin, 1; T. Ullman, 2; R. Winn, 3.
Harbour-front: W. McClung, 1; T. Ullman, 2; G. Collin, 3.



Saturday 9th March 1946  Page 10 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

A pictorial record of the State Dockyard and harbor front will be made tomorrow afternoon by members of the Newcastle Photographic Society. A launch has been made available by the State Dockyard and will leave the vicinity of the Stockton Ferry 2.30pm.



1st April 1946  Page 200 - Vol. 53 No. 4 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Truly there is more to a press photographer’s life than depicting fires or social celebrities!

Mr. Milton Merrilees, “Newcastle Sun” staff cameraman, told members that he once had the task of getting seven different angles on an egg. The eggs were all sorts of odd sizes and shapes sent in by readers after the publication of the picture of an outsize variety. The greatest factor in newspaper work, said Mr. Merrilees, was speed. Working against time, it was not possible to give pictures the attention to technical quality that was demanded by the serious amateur.

Members also heard the address by their club member, Mr. A. Reedman, on the making of lantern slides and copying. In order to achieve successful copying work, he said it was necessary to have readily accessible, rigidly constructed equipment that would ensure accurate alignment and sharp focusing.

The Society’s competition, conducted in conjunction with the outing to the State Dockyard, resulted in W.H. McClung first, H.M. Rice second.



1st May 1946  Page 250 - Vol. 53 No. 5 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
WHAT IS REALISM IN PHOTOGRAPHY?

Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society, after debating the merits of idealism and realism, still left the question undecided. It was their unanimous opinion that the realist was entitled to secure on his printing paper all the elements that were in his negative, but, on the question of what he was entitled to put into his negative through the use of light values and the medium of filters, there was no unity.

The debate was led by C. Collin, who contended that the photographer should be a realist, and E.C. Sara, who defended the licence that enabled him to make his picture according to his ideals.

The unanimous conclusion was that all photographers who aspired to salon standards were idealists.

Newcastle artist, Mr. R. Russom, who addressed the following meeting of the society on pictorial composition, also had something to say on the subject.

He saw no reason why the photographer should invade the field of the artist by composing his picture in the darkroom. He said that the development of photography had compelled the artist to take a new line of expression. It was the duty of the photographer to compose his picture in the best way he could from the elements that nature had provided at the time of taking.

Mr. Russom said that the greatest form of composition was the shape of the cross as exemplified in the scene of the crucifixion. Perpendicular lines gave the sense of calmness and solemnity. This was illustrated in the case of church spires. The “S” form of composition gave a feeling of serenity; the jagged lines of lighting a sense of violence. The latter composition could be used to advantage in conveying the tense atmosphere of battle scenes. Compositions based on the circle gave a sense of movement.

Generally, the atmosphere of dignity was portrayed by the use of upright lines, but horizontal lines were necessary to break the monotony.



Tuesday 14th May 1946  Page 6 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

PHOTOGRAPHERS LICENCE IN COMPOSITION
The right of photographers to use the same licence as artists to achieve a pleasing composition was queried last night by the Australian artist, Mr. R. Russom.

Mr. Russom was speaking on "Composition" at the meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society.

The photographer's picture should be composed before it was taken, Mr. Russom contended. The photographer had the right by technical means to make the best use of the elements in the negative, but additional printing in and montage work in the darkroom were not legitimate, he felt. In answer to suggestions by members of the society that photographers had the same right as artists to use licence. Mr. Russom claimed that the result was the photograph of a composed picture, not a photograph in the original sense.

Photography today had so far outstripped the Royal Academicians of 50 years ago that contemporary artists were forced to attempt a new line, Mr. Russom said.

An exhibition of prints by members of Newcastle Photographic Society is at present on view at Kodak's new gallery in Wolfe Street.



1st August 1946  Page 355 - Vol. 53 No. 8 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
A special feature of the meeting of July 22nd was an inspection of the Kodak - Monte Luke Traveling Loan Collection of Pictorial Photography. Members of the Society and of the North Newcastle Camera Club expressed their appreciation of being permitted to see the Exhibition before the prints were returned to their owners.

The Society secured three acceptances at the Adelaide Camera Club Second International. Voting (on a popular basis) on prints secured at the Redhead excursion resulted in: 1, A.T. Ullman; 2, K. Perry; 3, S. Wilson.



1st September 1946  Page 445 - Vol. 53 No. 9 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The Kodak film depicting the manufacture of cameras, lenses, film and other photographic material was shown at the first August meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society. The film was appreciated by members, not alone because of its function as a documentary but as a lesson in presentation for those who were users of cine cameras. It was supported by a color film, “The Power of the Land”, showing the evolution of English farming. Mr. C. Garside of Kodak’s Newcastle Branch, who presented the show, was accorded a motion of thanks moved by Mr. C. Hughes.



1st October 1946  Page 502 - Vol. 53 No. 10 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
“Lens hoods are as necessary in the standard equipment of cameras as bumper-bars on cars”, said Mr. T. Jackson, a society member in his address to members. He said that, while there was no need for the amateur to have a great number of accessories in order to do successful work, he saw no reason why lens hoods should not be manufactured as part of a camera.

The speaker at the 9th September, meeting was “Newcastle Sun” photographer, Mr. Cecil Piggott. He used slides to illustrate his address on the extensive range involved in press work. Press photographers, he said, differed from those in other branches in that they had to get their pictures when they were news and make the most of conditions that were outside the scope of their control. Mr. Piggott also showed three cine films depicting Newcastle’s V.P. (Victory in the Pacific) Day celebrations, scenic attractions of the district and the “wind jammer”, Lawhill.

The competition for animal or bird studies was won by A.T. Ullman, C. Collin was second and B. Aird third. Trophies were presented by the manager of the Kodak Newcastle Branch (Mr. G. Garside).



1st December 1946  Page 619 - Vol. 53 No. 12 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The Theory of Lenses formed the subject of two recent lectures to Newcastle Photographic Society by club members, Messrs. B. Aird and E. Suters. Mr. Aird described lens aberrations and discussed focal length and the effect of stops on depth of focus. Mr. Suters outlined the use of photomicrography in the steel industry. He produced samples of steel mounted and polished for microscopic examination and photographs of surface structures as revealed by the microscope.

The Society’s competitions resulted — September (Dudley Outing): 1, H.M. Rice; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, W.H. McClung (2). October (Morna Point Beach Outing): 1, C. Collin; 2, R. Winn.

The Society, in conjunction with Newcastle North Camera Club, is planning to organize a photographic exhibition as part of Newcastle’s 150th Anniversary Celebration next September.

The importance of thoroughly developing an idea was impressed by Mr. C. Collin in a talk to the first November meeting on “How I Make My Exhibition Prints”. He said that the serious amateur should plan his photograph in detail, enlist the co-operation of models if it were necessary and carefully select the time of picture making if lighting conditions were not under his control.

Fifty prints were shown for the “Best Photograph of the Year” competition, judged by Mr. Don Cameron. 1 and 3, C. Collin; 2, A. Reedman; 4, Miss Robinson. The awards were donated by club member, Mr. Cyril Hughes.



1st January 1947  Page 52 - Vol. 54 No. 1 The Australasian Photographic Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
A “photographic quiz night” provided the program for the meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society on 9th December. The Quiz Board, elected by members, comprised Messrs. D. Cameron, J. Porteous, C. Collin and the President (Mr. W.H. McClung). Questions ranged from the method of chemically cleaning a bottle to the technicalities of gamma.

Club member Mr. Athel D’Ombrain lectured at the Society’s previous meeting, his subject being “Titles — For and Against”. Summing up, he declared “titles were not altogether necessary and at times prints could well stand without them. The majority of photographers title their prints as a matter of course and give little thought to originality. Occasionally a good title could ‘carry the day’ with a print, but this class of title is a comparative rarity. If a title is to be used”, he continued, “it should be original without going to extremes, be the sole work of the author, be humorous where necessary, be neatly written and not printed, in pencil and be accurate. You won’t lose points for prints without titles, but you will for poorly titled efforts”.

The competition conducted in conjunction with the Glenrock Lagoon outing resulted: C. Collin, 1; T. Ullman (2) and Mrs. W.H. McClung, tied 2.



Tuesday 28th January 1947  Page 6 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

MAX DUPAIN TO SELECT BOOKLET PRINTS
Mr. Max Dupain, well known Australian photographer, will arrive in Newcastle on Friday, to select pictures from local photographers for use in 150th Anniversary publicity booklets. Mr. G.D. Mitchell, organizer of the celebrations, said today that Mr. Dupain would confer with the Newcastle Photographic Society, but would consider work by other photographers of standing. Mr. Dupain is well-known abroad and in Australia and has had much of his work exhibited overseas. He was for some time attached to the Royal Australian Air Force as a special photographer and later was retained by the Department of Information to make pictures of Australian capital cities for publicity abroad. Mr. Dupain will take scenes not covered by available prints.



Wednesday 29th January 1947  Page 7 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

WAR PHOTOGRAPHER FOR NEWCASTLE
The official photographer for Newcastle publications to be issued for the city's 150th anniversary celebrations is Mr. Max Dupain. During the war Mr. Maxwell Spencer Dupain was attached to the Royal Australian Air Force as special photographer and towards the end of the war and last year was commissioned by the Department of Information to take pictures of the capital cities for exhibition abroad. Mr. Dupain will arrive in Newcastle on Friday night and will confer with members of the Newcastle Photographic Society and other photographers to obtain their best works for inclusion in the books. He will also take shots of the city and its surroundings.

MAXWELL SPENCER DUPAIN

1st March 1947  Page 164 - Vol. 54 No. 3 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Newcastle Photographic Society most progressive year was reviewed in the Ninth Annual Report presented to members on 27th January.

Membership jumped from 28 at the close of 1945, to 45 at the close of 1946. Released from war-time restrictions, the Society was able to stimulate interest by organizing competitions in conjunction with each of its ten outings. Mr. C. Collin won four competitions, including the competition for the best print of the year; Mr. W.H. McClung won three; Mr. A.T. Ullman two; and Messrs. H.M. Rice and S.R. Wilson one each. Eight members had prints accepted in Australian and overseas Salons.

The report of the Treasurer, Mr. R. Winn, revealed an income of £73/19/3 and an expenditure of £6l/19/10, leaving a credit balance of £11/19/5. Society assets were listed at £49/1/7.

Election of officers resulted: President, Mr. W.H. McClung; Vice-President, Mr. C. Collin; Hon.Secretary, Mr. A.T. Ullman; Treasurer, Mr. R.N. Winn; Council, Messrs. J. Porteous, H.M. Rice, B. Aird and C. Stewart; Hanging Committee, Messrs. E.C. Sara, C. Collin, A.T. Ullman and J. Porteous; Delegates to Newcastle’s 150th Anniversary Exhibitions Committee, Messrs. A.T. Ullman and J. Porteous.

Mr. Keith McClure, of Sydney, who addressed the annual meeting on Creative Photography, made a plea for originality in conception and presentation. With a fine selection of prints, he showed how photo montage could be employed to convey the motive of the photographer.

Mr. Don Cameron, who addressed the first February meeting, told members that, having secured certain essentials in the negative, anybody could make a perfect enlargement. This theory was put into practice with a demonstration by Mr. Cameron in the Society’s darkroom.

He advised the making of standard prints of all worth-while negatives. The prints should be made at about two degrees of enlargement, using the whole of the negative and making the print on normal bromide. The prints would not be attractive in themselves, he said, but they would provide an excellent reference on questions of trimming, use of the correct contrast paper and the alteration of values by control printing.


April 1947  Page 206 - Australasian Photo-Review

REVERIE
W.H. McCLUNG

1st April 1947  Page 224 - Vol. 54 No. 4 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
“How Modern is Modernism?” asked the Editor of the A.P.-R. (Mr. Keast Burke) in an address to members of the Newcastle Photographic Society on 24th February.

The slides with which he illustrated his talk changed the conception of many members. Reproductions of early Chinese, Japanese and other prints, including those of some of the better known Old Masters, revealed the “photographic” outlook that characterizes much of the so-called modern camera work.

Mr. Burke's talk embraced highlights from his earlier addresses. His “Plea for the Male” deplored the comparatively little attention given to the male figure study.

Finally the speaker displayed a portfolio of prints from well-known overseas workers, depicting pictorial photography as it stood in 1925.

In contrast with that collection were 25 prints loaned to the society by Mr. Max Dupain.

Mr. Wal Fitness addressed the first March meeting of the society, describing the versatile movements of the view camera. With camera, graph and photograph, he illustrated the effect on depth of field and perspective of the various movements of the plate back and lens.

Society members were among the most successful exhibitors in the photographic sections of Newcastle and Maitland Shows. It was interesting to note that Maitland Show was conducted on Salon standards. Results:

Newcastle Show (Judge, Mr. J. Metcalfe):
LANDSCAPE OR FREE STUDY: 1, A.T. Ullman; 2, J.P. Carney.
SEASCAPE OR RIVER SCENE: 1, A.J. Reedman; 2, G. McClung.
PORTRAIT OR CHILD STUDY: 1, J.P. Carney; 2, O.A. Sims.
NEWCASTLE INDUSTRY OR SHIPPING: 1, A.T. Ullman; 2, C. Collin.
ANY OTHER SUBJECT: 1, C. Collin; 2, J.P. Carney.
MOST UNUSUAL PHOTOGRAPH: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, J.P. Carney.
HAND-COLORED PRINT: 1, O.A. Sims.
LOCAL CLASS - SIX CONTACT PRINTS ON STANDARD MOUNT: 1, G.S. Humphreys; 2, A.J. Reedman.

Maitland Show (Judge, Mr. Keast Burke):
SILVER PLAQUE: Charles Collin {Phantom of the Sky).
BRONZE PLAQUE: James Crosby (Murray Gum).
CERTIFICATES OF MERIT: L.A. Lyons (The Ringman), C. Collin (Mouse trap), Mollie Lyons (Poppies and Buds), J.P. Carney (Land Girl), Keith McClure {Bondage), W.H. McClung {Reverie).
COMMENDED: A.T. Ullman (The City Lights), J.P. Carney (Landscape), J.H. Caldwell (Timber), James Crosby (Rhythm in Gold), Athel F. D’Ombrain (Landmark), L.A. Lyons (Wet Street, Restless Sea, Leaves Are Falling), D. Mascord (Radiant Childhood).



1st May 1947  Page 283 - Vol. 54 No. 5 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The importance of using the correct degree of contrast in the paper to secure the most from each negative was stressed by Mr. Charles Collin at the first April meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society. In a talk on Printing, he discussed the relative merits and limitations of “gaslight”, bromide and chloro-bromide papers.

At their previous meeting members gained a “close-up” study of the moon with the aid of Mr. Mark Howarth’s telescope. The meeting was held at Mr. Howarth’s observatory. The methods of comparing photographs of the heavens in the search for new stars was demonstrated.

The competition conducted on the Society’s outing to the Boy Scouts training camp at Glenrock Lagoon, resulted:
Section I (Photograph of an Urchin): 1, C. Collin and W.H. McClung; 3, H. Rice.
Section 11 (Scout Camping Scene): 1, C. Collin; 2, W.H. McClung and A.T. Ullman.
Section 111 (Scouting Activities): 1, A.T. Ullman; 2, C. Collin, W.H. McClung and A.T. Ullman.



1st June 1947  Page 296 - Vol. 54 No. 6 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
A system of differential diffusion was demonstrated by club member, Mr. Tom Jackson, at the second April meeting. He explained the use of crumpled cellophane for any degree of diffusion in an enlargement. The cellophane should be kept on the move between lens and paper, as the percentage of the time it was kept in position governed the degree of diffusion.

This method, stated Mr. Jackson, had the advantage that any portion of the print could be given greater diffusion by tearing a hole in the cellophane and permitting some light rays to pass direct from the enlarger to the paper. Emphasis could thus be given to any particular area of the print.

Members of the Photographic Society of New South Wales, Dr. Chaffer and Mr. J. Metcalfe, addressed the Society’s first May meeting on color photography. Their talks were supplemented by the projection of 35mm and 2 1/4-square slides.

Five Photographic Society of New South Wales members joined in the Society’s 11th May, outing along the coast to Dudley.

The Town Hall competition for trophies donated by Mr. Jackson, resulted: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, A.J. Reedman; 3, A.T. Ullman.

Point-score progress: W.H. McClung, 7.7 points; C. Collin, 6 points; A.T. Ullman, 5.7 points; A.J. Reedman, 4 points; H.M. Marsh, 3.7 points.



Tuesday 24th June 1947  Page 5 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY URGES DISPLAY FOR 150th
If the 150th Celebrations Committee will provide staging expenses, Newcastle will have the premiere showing of 150 prints by Australia's leading photographers. The prints are those selected by judges for publication in Australia's first "Photographic Annual". They will be shown in conjunction with an exhibition by Newcastle photographers. The editor of the Annual (Mr. O. Zeigler) has suggested that the gold, silver and bronze plaques, awarded for outstanding work in the Annual, be presented at the opening of the Newcastle Photographic Exhibition, to be held in conjunction with the celebrations. The photographic exhibition was originally planned for the Newcastle Showground, but the Newcastle Photographic Society rejected the proposal because of unsatisfactory exhibition facilities there. Permission to hold the exhibition in Nesca House has been obtained, but the society will be unable to finance it without the aid of the Celebrations Committee. Officials of the Newcastle Photographic Society said today that the staging of the combined exhibition in Nesca House would involve far less expenditure than the Finance Committee had allocated for the display at the Showground.



1st July 1947  Page 400 - Volume 54 No. 7 - Australasian photo-review

NEWCASTLE’S 150th ANNIVERSARY CELEBRATIONS PHOTOGRAPHIC EXHIBITION
During the forthcoming 150th Anniversary Celebrations, which open on 5th September, the Newcastle Photographic Society has undertaken to organize an exhibition of photography at Nesca House, King Street.

Entries are invited from Newcastle and Hunter River District Amateurs, representing pictorial, historical and other subjects of local interest. All prints are required to be mounted on 20 x 16in. (vertical or horizontal), or 16 x 12in. (vertical only) mounts. Entries should be addressed to Hon.Secretary, Newcastle Photographic Society, 425 Hunter Street, Newcastle, or left with Kodak Ltd., Wolfe Street, Newcastle, or Tom Jackson’s, 18b Bolton Street, Newcastle. Entries must reach Newcastle on or before Friday 18th July. This early date is necessary for compiling the catalog.



1st July 1947  Page 400 - Volume 54 No. 7 - Australasian photo-review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Mr. Charles Collin was the speaker at the first June meeting. In an address on Printing, he explained many methods employed in obtaining good prints, “Print faults”, said Mr. Collin, “occur through lack of knowledge or carelessness on the part of the photographer”. Mr. Collin illustrated numerous errors which are often made during printing and imparted useful advice to members concerning remedies which could be used.

Competition results. Titles Competition — Picture Best Fitting Title: 1, C. Collin; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, Miss H. Robinson. Best Pictorial Work: 1, B. Aird; 2, A. Reedman; 3, C. Collin, Titles were: “Grace”, “Waterside Interlude”, “Odd”, “Landmark”, “Sandscape”, “Country Charm” and “Character of a City”.

Restricted Competition for members who had not won an award this year; 1, Miss H. Robinson; 2, A. Stewart; 3, C. Stewart. Point-score Progress: C. Collin, 14 points; A.T. Ullman, 9.7 points; Miss H. Robinson, 9 points; W. H. McClung. 8.7 points; A. Reedman, 8 points; B. Aird, 6 points; A. Stewart, 5 points; C. Stewart, 4 points; H. M. Rice. 3.7 points.



Wednesday 2nd July 1947  Page 8 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

PHOTO EXHIBITION FOR CELEBRATIONS
The photographic exhibition of Newcastle's 150th Anniversary Celebrations will be at Nesca House. The Finance Committee of the Celebrations Committee decided this yesterday. Included in the exhibition will be 150 prints, representing the work of Australia's foremost photographers.

The prints were selected for publication in September in Australia's first photographic annual. They are being lent by the editor (Mr. O.L. Ziegler) of Sydney. Mr. Ziegler suggested that awards won by 16 of the prints be presented at the opening of the exhibition.

Members of Newcastle Photographic Society and other photographers in the Hunter district are invited to submit prints for the exhibition. Prints must be on standard 20in. x 16in. or 16in. x 12in. mounts and should be delivered to the Hon.Secretary of the Newcastle Photographic Society in Hunter-street before 18th July. They will be submitted to the judging committee and cataloged.



1st August 1947  Page 412 - Vol. 54 No. 8 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Ten-minute talks by three members provided the program for the first July meeting. Mr. C. Collin discussed table-top photography, Mr. B. Aird solarisation and Mr. T. Jackson wartime achievements in photography.

Competition results;
DUDLEY-KAHIBAH OUTING: 1, R. Winn; 2, C. Stewart; 3, A. Stewart.
TABLE TOP: J. Stewart and A. Stewart (equal); 3, C. Collin and A. Stewart (equal).
STILL LIFE: 1, T. Jackson; 2, R. Winn and Miss H. Robinson (equal).

Trophies for the table-top and still-life competitions were presented by the manager of Kodak’s Newcastle Branch (Mr. G. Garside).

Leading members in the point score progress are; C. Collin, 18 points; A.M. Stewart, 12.5 points; Miss H. Robinson, 12.5 points; A.T. Ullman, 10.7 points; R. Winn, 10.5 points; W.H. McClung, 9.7 points; C. Stewart, 9 points; A. Reedman, 8 points; B. Aird, 7 points; J. Stewart, 5.5 points.



1st September 1947  Page 523 - Vol. 54 No. 9 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
More than 270 prints have been accepted by the Newcastle Photographic Society for the photographic exhibition to be held in conjunction with the city’s 150th Anniversary Celebrations in September. The exhibition will be opened at Nesca House on 5th September, by the Mayor of Newcastle and will provide the first Australian showing of 150 prints selected for publication in the first edition of Australian Photography. Award winners in the contest will be entertained at a luncheon on 5th September, and will be presented with their awards at the official opening.

Club member Mr. H.M. Marsh addressed the second July meeting of the Society on the reflection of light. He emphasized the need for adjustment in the lamp house of an enlarger, so that lamps of different make could be fixed to give even overall illumination.

Mr. Tom Jackson, who gave the address at the first August meeting, demonstrated high-speed flash equipment. Members were invited to use their own cameras for fast action shots.

Society competitions resulted: Open subject (restricted to members with not more than seven points on the competition table): 1, S. Power; 2, J. Stewart; 3, Mrs. W.H. McClung.
Warner’s Bay-Belmont Outing; 1 (equal), R. Winn and A.M. Stewart; 3, A.T. Ullman.

Point score progress: C. Collin, 19; A.M. Stewart, 17; R. Winn, 15; A.T. Ullman, 13.7; Miss H.V. Robinson, 12.5; J. Stewart, 10.5; C. Stewart, 10; W.H. McClung, 9.7; B. Aird, 8; A. Reedman, 8.



Tuesday 2nd September 1947  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

PHOTOGRAPHERS ART ON DISPLAY FRIDAY
The best work of Australian modern pictorial photographers is included in the 150th Anniversary photographic exhibition.

The show is being arranged by Newcastle Photographic Society. Its opening by the Mayor (Alderman Harry D. Quinlan) at Nesca House on Friday afternoon will be one of the first official functions of the celebrations.

Nearly 900 prints went before the Judges, who selected 276 for inclusion in the exhibition. Of these 154 were selected from the work of photographers from many parts of Australia who contributed to "Australian Photography 1947", Australia's first photographic annual.

After the exhibition closes on 20th September the prints will be exhibited in every capital city. Newcastle and Hunter Valley photographers submitted 166 prints, of which the selection committee accepted 122. The prints in the Newcastle section of the exhibition will represent the work of 23 amateur and professional workers. Several of the prints in the section have been accepted for international exhibitions.

Presentation of awards in the "Australian Photography" competition will be made by Alderman Harry D. Quinlan at the official opening. Before the opening members of the Newcastle Photographic Society will entertain visiting photographers at a luncheon. The show will be opened on week-days from 9am till 5pm and on Saturday from 9am till noon.

On the night of 8th September members of the Newcastle Photographic Society will take part in a criticism of the exhibition. The public may attend.



Friday 5th September 1947  Page 4 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

BEST PHOTOGRAPH SHOW BY AUSTRALIANS
The Anniversary celebrations photographic exhibition in Nesca house comprises the best selection of work by Australian photographers yet seen in the country. When the Newcastle Exhibition closes, the photographs will be exhibited in the capital cities. It will be officially opened to-day at 2.30pm by the Mayor (Alderman Harry D. Quinlan).

The main section is made up of 148 prints selected for publication in November in the first Australian Photographic Annual, by the Editor, Mr. O. Ziegler and there are 121 prints by Newcastle and Hunter Valley photographers.

Awards of one gold plaque, a silver plaque and eight bronze plaques have been made for the best work for the annual and these will be presented tomorrow by Alderman Harry D. Quinlan. The winners, who include some of the best known photographers in the Commonwealth, will be entertained at a luncheon to-day by the Newcastle Photographic Society, which organized the exhibition.

Both professional and amateur photographers have contributed work which covers pictorial and portrait work, advertising, Press, scientific, industrial and fashion pictures. Every work has as its guiding principle an artistic conception, the quality which makes the exhibition photographer a serious challenge to the artist.

The yardstick might well be "The Three Sisters" by T. Jackson, of Newcastle, a splendid enlargement from a 35mm film shot of the famous Blue Mountains scenic spot. Dozens of artists have lugged their canvases and paints to this spot.

The photographer, by skillful use of diffusion on the distant ranges and a nice balance of tone on a sympathetic paper has created a picture which is quite as stimulating and interesting as a brush and color work.

The best pictures in the main section are magnificent, but the Newcastle photographers are not in the least outclassed.

NEWCASTLE WORK
Some of the best work in the local section is by such exhibitors as Athel D'Ombrain, A.T. Ullman, W.H. McClung, C. Collin, O. Sims and T. Jackson, who have achieved international selection with some of their pictures. Collin's "The Shearsman" is one of the outstanding industrial pictures and McClung's "Sunday Morning" catches that fascinating moment when sunshine burns round the edges of the trees and objects in the landscape.

Other excellent studies are H. Wilkinson's "Approaching Storm", Collin's character study, "The Addict"; Ernst Baumwald's "Mountain Window", the best story picture in the show and pictures by A. Miller, T. Hall and A.M. Stewart.

The gold plaque winner, "Mary", by Axel Poignant, is a great character study of an aboriginal suckling her baby. Portraiture is one of the strong points of the exhibition. Laurence Le Guay's picture of Chips Rafferty, seen making up a cigarette and with a quizzical look in his eye, will be the champion picture for many visitors. It is surely one of the most typically Australian portraits made.

Dr. Julian Smith, whose pictures are of world standard, has a study of Oscar Hammerstein II and portraits labeled "Weller SR" and "Bulldog Drummond", all of which have a live quality which make them memorable.

The exhibition will be open daily until 20th September.

left to right  Mayor, Alderman Harry D. Quinlan and George Wells

1947 MAYOR, ALDERMAN HARRY D. QUINLAN
1948-1950 LORD MAYOR, ALDERMAN HARRY D. QUINLAN

Saturday 6th September 1947  Page 2 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

PHOTOGRAPHIC DISPLAY
The photographic exhibition at Nesca House in King Street closed today at noon, but will be open again on Monday at 9am. This excellent collection of pictures is attracting large crowds. Some of the photographs have been exhibited in international exhibitions. The Newcastle Photographic Society is to hold a meeting at Nesca House on Monday night, at which the prints will be criticized by Mr. D. Cameron. The public is invited to attend.



Saturday 6th September 1947  Page 6 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

JUDGES PRAISE AMATEUR PHOTOGRAPHERS
The work of amateur photographers who had entered pictures for the anniversary photographic exhibition were praised by two judges who spoke at the opening of the exhibition yesterday.

The exhibition, which was the first official function of the celebrations, was opened by the Mayor (Ald Quinlan) at Nesca House. Speakers were introduced by the President of the Newcastle Photographic Society (Mr. W.H. McClung). The Mayor presented plaques to the following award winners - Messrs. Axel Poignant, John Lee, Hal Missingham, all of Sydney, Geoffrey Powell (Newport Beach) and Miss Margaret Michaelis (Sydney).

Mr. Woodward Smith, of Sydney University, who judged the Australian section, said the amateur entries showed remarkable quality. The professional efforts, while technically excellent, showed dullness of imagination. A photograph should not imitate any other form of art. It should not resemble an etching, a water color nor an oil, he said.

NEED LOCAL COLOR
The Director of the N.S.W. Art Gallery (Mr. Hal. Missingham), who judged the Newcastle District section, said he had expected to see many photographs of mines, collieries, vineyards and beaches in the local section, but very few had been entered. Many were competently executed, but he considered that more than half the interest and charm lay in a reflection of local character.

The Mayor said he considered photographs one of the best advertising mediums to attract visitors from other parts of the world. Such an exhibition would be a big step to wards having Newcastle area better known among outside people.



Monday 8th September 1947  Page 4 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

PRIZE AWARDS FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS OF NEWCASTLE
Awards for the best prints by Newcastle and Hunter Valley photographers in the anniversary photographic exhibition at Nesca House have been made by the Director of the N.S.W. Art Gallery (Mr. Hal Missingham). First prize was won by C. Collin for his character study, "The Addict"; second prize went to A.T. Ullman "Breakers Ahead" and the third to Athel F. D'Ombrain for "The Sphinx, Morpeth House," a study of an historical landmark. The President of the Newcastle Photographic Society (Mr. W.H. McClung) said yesterday, there had been a big public response to the exhibition. It would be open daily until September 20 and might be extended. At a meeting of the society tonight in Nesca House at 8pm, Mr. D. Cameron will criticize the exhibition prints. The public is invited.

ATHEL F. D'OMBRAIN

Wednesday 24th September 1947  Page 6 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

PHOTOGRAPHIC EXHIBITION EXTENDED
The photographic show and exhibition at Nesca House has been extended at the request of the management of Nesca. The show will close on 4th October. About 70 prints sent to other exhibitions have been replaced by prints from members of Newcastle Photographic Society.



Wednesday 19th May 1948  Page 6 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)
Saturday 22nd May 1948  Page 5 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
requires centrally situated premises for club quarters - LARGE ROOM (approx. 25ft.), preferably with smaller room adjoining. Particulars to A.T. ULLMAN. Hon.Secretary, Hunter-street, Newcastle.



Thursday 16th September 1948  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

SEEK GRANT FOR WEEK OF FESTIVAL
The Lord Mayor (Alderman Quinlan) will ask the Acting Premier (Mr. Baddeley) in Sydney tomorrow for a Government grant towards expenses of the week of festival planned to mark the Royal visit to Newcastle on Saturday 9th April.

The Lord Mayor would like to see the Newcastle Photographic Society arrange a display in Nesca House.



1st October 1947  Page 543 - Vol. 54 No. 10 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE’S ANNIVERSARY EXHIBITION
Photographers who contributed to the Newcastle 150th Anniversary Photographic Exhibition gave the city one of the most impressive shows of its celebrations. The exhibition comprised 270 prints — l48 selected for publication in “Australian Photography, 1947” and 122 from photographers in the Newcastle and Hunter district.

The Mayor of Newcastle (Alderman H.D. Quinlan) officially opened the exhibition after visiting photographers had been taken on a car trip of the district and entertained at luncheon.

Alderman H.D. Quinlan presented awards won by competitors in the “Australian Photography” section. Award winners for black-and-white work were: Gold Plaque, Axel Poignant; Silver Plaques, Monte Luke, Max Dupain, and Laurence Le Guay; Bronze Plaques, Hal Missingham, John Lee, Paul Horne, Geoffrey Powell, Margaret Michaelis and the late W.G. Buckle.

Mr. S. Woodward-Smith, the color section judge, said that, while the quality was high, representing as it did the best of Australian photography, the section did not overshadow the work of the Newcastle photographers.

Judge for the Newcastle section, Mr. Hal Missingham, said that in a highly industrialized center he would have expected more photographs of mines and of the heavy industries. He made first award to C. Collin’s “The Addict”, second to A.T. Ullman’s “Breakers Ahead” and third to Athel F. D’Ombrain’s “Sphinx, Morpeth House”.

Mr. Don Campbell commented on the prints when members of the Newcastle Photographic Society held their meeting at the exhibition on 8th September. He said that the dominating note of the show was the strong sense of design.

The address at the second August meeting was given by club member Mr. Arnold Reedman. He detailed the development of the paper negative and produced several paper negatives, primary and secondary prints to illustrate his talk.

The Society’s competition conducted in conjunction with the West-Sandgate/Mayfield outing resulted: W.H. McClung, 1; A.M. Stewart, 2; T. Jackson, 3.

Point score progress: A.M. Stewart, 21; C. Collin, 20; R.N. Winn, 16; W.H. McClung, 14.7; A.T. Ullman, 14.7; Miss H.V. Robinson, 12.5; J. Stewart, 11.5; C. Stewart, 11 ; B. Arid, 8; A.J. Reedman, 8; T. Jackson 8; S. Power, 5; H.M. Rice, 4.7.

left to right  Mayor, Alderman Harry D. Quinlan and George Wells

1947 MAYOR, ALDERMAN HARRY D. QUINLAN
1948-1950 LORD MAYOR, ALDERMAN HARRY D. QUINLAN

1st November 1947  Page 596 - Vol. 54 No. 11 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Full exposure of the negative in the paper negative process was recommended by Mr. J.W. Metcalfe, of Sydney, when he addressed the Newcastle Photographic Society on 22nd September.

Examples of his work were so heavily printed that, as in the case of negatives, they showed detail only when viewed by transmitted light. He urged the use of a hard pencil so that the desired result could be achieved by a gradual building-up process. Paper negative work offered such scope in the alteration of tone values that it could mar, rather than make, pictures, he said. Experience was an important factor in its application.

Society members devoted their 13th October, meeting to a discussion of twenty prints made by members of the Wollongong Camera Club. Their criticism has been sent to the Wollongong Camera Club.

Club Competitions resulted — September Open: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, A.M. Stewart and C. Collin. Hexham Outing: 1, A.T. Ullman; 2, C. Collin and A.M. Stewart.

Point-score progress; A.M. Stewart, 28; C. Collin, 27; A.T. Ullman, 20.7; W.H. McClung, 20.7; R. Winn, 17; C. Stewart, 13; Miss H. Robinson, 12.5; J. Stewart, 11.5; A.J. Reedman, 9.



1st December 1947  Page 654 - Vol. 54 No. 12 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The application of make-up in relation to particular models in portraiture was described by Mr. Colin Shayler at the 10th November, meeting. He warned against over-use of cosmetics. Rouge was helpful in relieving unwanted emphasis on such features as high jaw bones. Eye shade was helpful in the case of certain models whose eye cavities were not deep. Darker shades of lipstick were preferred, but the lips should never be given a painted appearance, which is inclined to draw attention away from the eyes, which should be the main feature of any photograph.

Mr. Shayler said that camera angle and light position had an important relationship to the portrayal of features. The subject should be studied and the lighting and camera angle used accordingly to give emphasis to or subdue features as required.

Members who attended the 27th October, meeting learned something of the progress of photography in the last quarter-century. Guests of the Society were former members of the Newcastle Camera Circle, the first Photographic Society in the Newcastle district.



1st January 1948  Page 4 - Vol. 55 No. 1 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
“Photographers should plan their exposures to ensure that they would be using the straight part of the film’s characteristic curve”, said Mr. J. Porteous in his lecture delivered to the second November meeting.

The Society conducted a quiz night at its first December meeting.

Competition results:
November Open: C. Collin 1, A.M. Stewart 2, R. Winn 3.
Raymond Terrace Outing: A.M. Stewart 1, W.H. McClung 2, H.M. Rice 3.

Final scores of leading competitors in the point score competition were: A.M. Stewart 37, C. Collin 32, W.H. McClung 25.7, A.T. Ullman 21.7, R. Winn 20, C. Stewart 15, J. Stewart 13.5, Miss H.V. Robinson 13.5, H.M. Rice 9.7, B. Aird 9, A.J. Reedman 9, T. Jackson 9, S. Power 7.

LANDING DESIGN
W.H. McCLUNG

1st February 1948  Page 103 - Vol. 55 No. 2 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The successful organization of the city’s 150th Anniversary Photographic Exhibition had marked 1947 as the most successful year in the history of the Newcastle Photographic Society, stated the Society’s annual report, presented by the President (Mr. W.H. McClung).

In all phases of activity the Society established new records. Membership increased from 43 at the end of 1946 to 47 at the close of 1947. The Society conducted 18 competitions. The value of club activity was evident in the improvement in the standard of work presented.

Trophy winners at the close of the year were:
Point score competition: A.M. Stewart, 1; C. Collin, 2; W.H. McClung, 3.
Print of the year: C. Collin, 1 ; Miss H.V. Robinson, 2; R. Winn, 3.
Most improved workers during the year: R. Winn, 1; Miss H.V. Robinson, 2; C. Stewart, 3.



1st March 1948  Page 160 - Vol. 55 No. 3 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
This Society will conduct a course of instruction for beginners commencing on 12th April, and extending over a period of four months. It will embrace fortnightly talks and darkroom demonstrations. Course fee of five shillings will entitle the student to honorary membership in the Society during the period. Amateurs interested may obtain further particulars from Kodak Ltd., Newcastle, or from officials of the Society.

Mr. J. Metcalfe, of Sydney, who addressed the first February meeting of members, demonstrated how to “save” an imperfect print. He showed the application of local reduction and a mild form of toning by potassium permanganate and barium sulphide baths.

Mr. Metcalfe, who judged the Society’s paper negative competition, placed A.J. Reedman’s print first and A.T. Ullman’s second.

The election of officers at the annual meeting resulted: President, Mr. W.H. McClung; Vice-President, Mr. C. Collin; Hon.Secretary, Mr. A.T. Ullman; Assistant Secretary, Mr. B. Aird; Treasurer, Mr. R. Winn; Auditor, Mr. R. Brown; Council, Messrs. M. Rice, C. Stewart, B. Aird and S. Power.



1st April 1948  Page 221 - Vol. 55 No. 4 Australasian Photo-Review

PHOTOGRAPHIC COURSE AT NEWCASTLE
The Newcastle Photographic Society has decided to conduct an eight-lecture course in photography for novice members and other Newcastle amateurs. Experienced members of the Society will give fortnightly lectures and demonstrations on every phase of amateur photography. The class will start on 12th April, at the Society’s Rooms, 425 Hunter Street. Five of the demonstrations will be given in the Society’s darkroom.

A class fee of 5/- entitles amateurs to honorary membership in the Society for the duration of the course.

Further particulars are available at Kodak’s Newcastle Branch.



April 1948  Page 221 - Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
“Many artists could improve their work if they had a greater appreciation of photography”, said Mr. C. Raisbeck, artist, in his lecture, “What Makes a picture?”, delivered at the second February meeting.

“Appreciation of the subject”, said Mr. Raisbeck, "is the first essential to successful work. Then comes the arrangement, or, in other words, the composition. Nothing of secondary interest must be allowed to intrude, as it detracts interest from the main subject, There should be some story to tell and this is where lines play an important part in conveying the meaning. Good lines express motion and feeling, bad lines, indecision and weakness of composition. Straight or curved horizontal lines denote tranquility; vertical lines, vitality; and a lightning - like twisted line, turbulence.

Generally speaking, the fewer tone values in the picture, the greater its chance of success. It should be the aim of the picture-maker to put the darkest dark and the lightest light into the main subject. Foreground is usually the greatest bugbear in landscape work for artists and photographers alike”.

Mr. Raisbeck showed a number of his watercolor paintings to illustrate his address.

Mr. Clive Kay, former president of the Newcastle Cine Society, provided the address and film show at the first March meeting. He discussed the relative exposure latitude of panchromatic and Kodachrome films. He said that, in using Kodachrome the range of lighting on the subject should be such that meter readings do not vary more than a stop and a half.

Mr. Kay’s films included a Sherlock Cup award winner photographed in the Kangaroo Valley.



1st May 1948  Page 240 - Vol. 55 No. 5 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
A practical demonstration of the make-up of a standard developer showed members of the Newcastle Photographic Society the effect of the various components and their combinations. The darkroom demonstration was given at the Society’s second March meeting by Mr. Rus Hughes, a member of Kodak’s Newcastle staff.

Mr. Colin Shayler, Newcastle commercial photographer, criticized the twenty-five prints entered in the portraiture competition at the first April meeting.

Competitions resulted:
Portraiture: 1, S. Power; 2, J.W. Brown; 3, Miss H.V. Robinson and C. Harris.
Harbour Outing: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, J. Stewart.

Progress scores in the Society’s 1948 Point Score are: A.T. Ullman 11, A.J. Reedman 9, W.H. McClung 9, C. Stewart 7, S. Power 5. J. Stewart 4, J.W. Brown 4, C. Collin 2, C. Harris 1 1/2, Miss H.V. Robinson 1 1/2.



1st June 1948  Page 300 - Vol. 55 No. 6 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
“Photographic art must have a soul”, declared Mr. E.C. Sara, in his address to the first May meeting on “Pictorial Construction”.

“Technical and mechanical perfection is not in itself sufficient,” he said. “We must have a knowledge of the factors necessary to imbue a picture with aesthetic qualities. Composition is the keystone of pictorial design. Devoid of a sense of composition, the picture will be uninteresting despite its good processing”.

Composition he defined as the reduction to an orderly arrangement of the forms, shapes and lines of the picture.

The Society’s Hon.Secretary, Mr. A.T. Ullman, who addressed the second April meeting on “Flower Photography”, gave a practical demonstration of the work involved. He impressed on the audience the need for attention to detail, particularly in relation to arrangement, lighting and background. He used jars of damp sand to simplify the positioning of the flowers and to minimise the vibration.

Mr. Ullman showed some of his flower study prints, which revealed the high standard of his work.

Society competitions resulted:
Clouds: 1, B.L. McNamara; 2, J.W. Brown; 3, S. Power and W.H. McClung (equal).
Cooranbong Outing: 1, R. Winn; 2, C. Collin; 3, H.M. Rice.

Point-score progress: A.T. Ullman 13; A.J. Reedman 13; W.H. McClung 10 1/2; C. Collin 7; G. Stewart 7; R. Winn 7; S. Power 6 1/2; B.L. McNamara 5; J.W. Brown 4; H.M. Rice 4; J. Stewart 4; C. Harris 3 1/2; Miss H.V. Robinson 1 1/2.

Program preview:
May 24, Mr. D. Cameron — Reproduction of Color in Monochrome;
June 14, Mr. L. Cavalier — Lenses;
June 28, Gadgets Competition and Demonstration;
July 12, J.W. Lipscomb, Sydney artist — Relationship of Photography to Art;
July 26, Debate — Miniature v. Standard-size Cameras.



1st July 1948  Page 411 - Vol. 55 No. 7 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The “perfect camera” was described by Mr. L. Cavalier, of Newcastle, in a talk to members of Newcastle Photographic Society on 14th June. He said that the camera had automatic focusing, automatic exposure, immediate projection and the retention of a record for future use.

No revolution in the photographic industry produced this super instrument. Mr. Cavalier reminded his audience that each member possessed two such cameras — they were his own eyes.

Mr. Cavalier used his description of the human eye to detail the history of lens construction and the manner in which aberrations were corrected.

He forecast a revolution in camera construction which would replace the lens with a parabolic reflector and incorporate the principle employed in the construction of the larger telescopes. The change, he said, would ensure that all light reflected from the subject would be used to record the image on the film, thus obviating the loss of light experienced as it passed through each element of the lens.

Mr. Don Cameron, addressing members at the second May meeting on the reproduction of color in monochrome, employed a practical method to illustrate the effect of light filters. Using a slide projected with color filters in place of the slides, he projected the colored light beams on charts showing every color of the spectrum. Members saw at a glance how a particular filter lightened its own color and darkened the color opposite in the circular arrangement of the spectrum.

Club competitions resulted:
OPEN: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, A.M. Stewart; 3, E.A. Walpole and S. Power (equal).
NEWCASTLE CATHEDRAL OUTING; 1, C. Harris; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, C. Stewart.



1st August 1948  Page 486 - Vol. 55 No. 8 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Very few photographers realized the full possibilities of the magnificent medium which they had at their disposal, said Sydney artist Mr. John Lipscomb in his address on 12th July. By using their medium to its full extent on the purely objective side, photographers had the opportunity to produce an entirely new field of vision.

Mr. Lipscomb found fault with photographers who, with out-of-focus effects, aped the work of the impressionist painters. He defended the right of the artist — and photographer — to use his medium to present his own impression — to compose from his own mind instead of presenting an exact reproduction of what he saw. With imagination the photographer could control his medium in the same way as does an artist.

The success or failure of a work of art depended on the balance between purely objective work and the product of imagination.

“In art”, said Mr. Lipscomb, “we should strive to be more like serpents and shed our skins. We are clinging too much to the old traditions of past generations. In Australia, a land of sunshine, we still see houses built with the steeply sloping roofs designed in England for the practical purpose there of shedding snow.

“It is the same in art. The English painters who came early to Australia painted our landscapes in the light in which they were accustomed, instead of presenting the clean-cut brilliantly-lit features of our landscapes. They painted Government House in their Sydney Harbour scenes because the building, with its English architecture, was familiar and appealed to them.

“The modern artist is more realistic. Only in recent centuries have artists painted mountains. Not many years ago an artist who painted a scene in the slums would be regarded as queer. Art has changed the attitude of people to such subjects.”

Society competitions resulted:
OPEN SUBJECT: A.T. Ullman, 1; J.W. Brown, 2; W.H. McClung, 3.
GADGETS COMPETITION: C. Collin (improved clock for darkroom use), 1; W.H. McClung (accessories case), 2; A.M. Stewart (combined mask and paper holder), 3.
POINT-SCORE PROGRESS: W.H. McClung, 22.5; A.T. Ullman, 19; A.J. Reedman, 13; G. Stewart, 11; S. Power, 8; R. Winn, 8; J.W. Brown, 8; C. Collin, 8; C. Harris

PANTHER LILY
A.T. ULLMAN

1st September 1948  Page 545 - Vol. 55 No. 9 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The variable conditions under which Mr. Albert Chambers, of Wollongong, made his transparencies provided interesting material for his showing at the Society’s meeting on 9th August.

Some of his most attractive work captured the quieter tones of nature’s moods. He demonstrated how successful work could be the result of a not too rigid adherence to instructions on “correct” lighting conditions.

Some of his South Coast landscapes taken on dull days lacked the striking color brilliance associated with most color processes, but they showed effectively the ability of color film to capture the all - important aspect of mood.

Mr. Chambers emphasized that when the light range was too great for the latitude of Kodachrome in outdoor work, good work could be produced by exposing for the darker regions and cutting the sky out of the picture. His showing included slides which had gained overseas acceptances.

For the second July meeting, the Society projected instructional films (kindly loaned by Kodak Ltd.) on lenses, the use of exposure meters and the effect of filters.

“Redhead Outing” competition resulted: 1, A.T. Ullman; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, C. Collin.

Point score progress: W.H. McClung 26.5, A.T. Ullman 24, C. Collin 15, A.J. Reedman 13, C. Stewart 11, A.M. Stewart 10, J.W. Brown 9, R. Winn 8, J. Harris 7.



1st October 1948  Page 592 - Vol. 55 No. 10 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Club members, at the first September meeting, debated the merits of miniature and larger-size cameras. Teams were — Miniature: W.H. McClung (leader), J. Shields, I. Brown and E. Walpole. Larger Size: C. Collin (leader), T. Jackson, H. Rice and A. Stewart. The vote proved even when members were asked to vote on which side had presented the best argument.

The second August meeting of the Society was held at the process engraving plant of S.A. Best Pty. Ltd., where the manager (Mr. Marshall) gave a practical demonstration of the work involved in process engraving.



1st November 1948
Page 634 - Vol. 55 No. 11 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Members are displaying their versatility as working bees in equipping the new clubrooms on the Pacific Highway, Adamstown. The quarters consist of a meeting room and a darkroom. Meetings will be held there on the second and fourth Mondays of each month.

The first October meeting was held at the Evelyn Mellor Photographic Studios, where Mr. Essex Mellor demonstrated portrait lighting and darkroom technique. Mr. Jack Shields demonstrated the art of the re-toucher.

Mr. Howard Barron, Sydney artist, addressed members at the second September meeting. He discussed the work of members from the artist’s view point. While he admitted the ability of the artist to control the elements of his picture, he reminded his photographic audience that it had that advantage of being able to capture in a fraction of a second those fleeting light conditions which were so essential in pictorial work.

The Shoal Bay-Halifax Park competition resulted: 1, F. Tully; 2, R.N. Winn; 3, W.H. McClung.

Point-score progress: W.H. McClung, 29.5; A.T. Ullman, 25; C. Collin, 16; A.J. Reedman, 13; R.N. Winn, 12; G. Stewart, 12; A.M. Stewart, 10; J.W. Brown, 9; F. Tully, 8; S. Power, 8.



1st December 1948  Page 754 - Vol. 55 No. 12 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Mr. C. Collin, vice-president of the Society, gave members at the first November meeting a practical demonstration of various methods of printing-in clouds. He showed dry and wet printing methods using pre-cut masks for the alternate printing of foreground and sky. In the second process Mr. Collin printed the foreground, stopped development as soon as the image appeared, and put the wet paper on a sheet of glass to use the outline as a guide for the second printing of the cloud.

He stressed the importance of matching clouds with the scene, particularly in respect to the direction of the lighting, and of carefully making test strips from each negative to ensure uniformity of tone in the final print.

Seven speakers provided a symposium program at the Society’s second October meeting; these were Messrs. J. Brown (Aerial Photography), H. Walpole (Weight and Measure Systems), A Stewart (Portraiture), L. Lawson (Construction of an Electric Film Dryer), C. Collin (Cameras I Have Used), and W. McClung (Photographic Christmas Cards), and Mrs. M. Pitt (Snow Photography).

Competition results; Open (judged by popular vote); 1, F. Tully; 2, W. Winn; 3, C. Stewart.
Portraiture (judged by Mr. Hilton Wilkinson): 1, A. M. Stewart; 2, J. Shields; 3, W. McClung.



1st February 1949  Page 121 - Vol. 56 No. 2 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The lesson which members of this society learned when Mr. O.A. Sims, of New Lambton, addressed them on 6th December, was the importance of working to a plan.

The quality of Mr. Sims exhibition prints revealed that his plan did not stop with the taking of the photograph. Every stage of the process was carefully planned from the selection and arrangement of the subject to the final mounting and handwork on the print. Several of the twenty-five prints which made up his one-man exhibition had won fame in the international field.

Mr. Sims said he specialized in the use of Kodak Super-XX film, exposed it fully with regard to his particular subject and then developed it for the production of a soft negative. He cut his film if he considered that any particular subject demanded a certain contrast.

He impressed members with the variety of his achievements from experiments in toning.

Mr. E.L. Samuels, a Newcastle optician, addressed the second November meeting on Stereoscopic Vision. He produced diagrams to test the ability of the audience to adjust their unaided eyes to gain third dimensional effects.

Club competitions resulted:
PORTRAITURE: 1, A.M. Stewart; 2, J. Shields; 3, W.H. McClung.
ANIMAL STUDY: 1, A.M. Stewart; 2, D. Cook; 3, A.T. Ullman.
PHOTOGRAPHIC CHRISTMAS CARD; 1, F. Tully; 2, Mrs. M. Pitt; 3, R.N. Winn.

A Christmas Party and presentation of awards marked the close of the Society’s year. Mr. Don Cameron judged the Print of the Year competition, for which Mr. Cyril Hughes donated the trophies. The competition attracted thirty-two entries. It was won by F. Tully, with A.M. Stewart second and W.H. McClung third.

The Council adjudged S. Power as the member whose work had improved most during the year. F. Tully gained second award and G. Stewart third.

Final results in the point-score competition were: W.H. McClung 34.5, A.T. Ullman 29, A.M. Stewart 20, F. Tully 20, R.N. Winn 19, C. Collin 18, C. Stewart 16, A. Reedman 14, J.W. Brown 9, S. Power 9, G. Harris 7, J. Shields 7, Mrs. H.V. Pitt 6.5, H.M. Rice 5, D. Cook 5, J. Stewart 4, E.A. Walpole 3.5.



1st March 1949  Page 187 - Vol. 56 No. 3 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The report presented at the annual meeting revealed that 1948 was the Society’s most successful year.

Membership reached an all-time record of 50. The credit balance at the end of the year was £5l/18/2, as against £32/8/5 at the close of 1947.

The election of officers resulted; President, W.H. McClung; Vice-President, C. Collin; Hon.Secretary, A.T. Ullman; Assistant Secretary and Program Organizer, B. Aird; Treasurer, R.N. Winn; Outings Organizer, C. Collin; Council: H.M. Rice, S. Power, B. Aird and A.M. Stewart.

The Society’s first President, Mr. G.H. Shipway, addressed the meeting on the “Application of Photography”.

Three members, Messrs. C. Collin, A.T. Ullman and W.H. McClung, were the speakers at the first February meeting. They answered the question, “What Developer Do You Use, and Why?”.

Speakers were unanimous in their advice to members to know the characteristics of the particular developers of their preference. When they were familiar with those developers, Mr. Collin suggested they could then experiment and compare results with those obtained from basic developers.

The Kotara Outing competition resulted; 1, R.N. Winn; 2, C. Collin; 3, A.T. Ullman.

SOLITUDE
F.A. TULLY
PRINT OF THE YEAR

1st April 1949  Page 254 - Vol. 56 No. 4 The Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Newcastle professional photographers, Messrs. H. Sanderson and W. Hannan, addressed the meetings on 28th February and 14th March.

Mr. Sanderson described the Mortensen technique and stressed the need for rigid adherence to it at every stage of the process. He said that to achieve the result in portraiture according to the Mortensen formula, it was necessary to combine the effect of particular lighting, exposure and development.

Mr. Hannan gave a series of hints on darkroom operation, covering practically everything from wetting agents to diffusion in enlarging.

The Society’s open competition for February resulted: 1, A.M. Stewart; 2, R. Winn; 3, C. Collin.

Twenty-nine members joined the beginners class which opened on 14th March. Mr. C. Collin lectured on equipment and its use.



1st May 1949  Page 322 - Vol. 56 No. 5 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Composition was not always a vital factor in photography, said club member, Mr. E. Walpole, at the meeting on 11th April. Mr. Walpole spoke on functional photography, particularly in relation to industry.

He said that where it was practical the observance of the common rules of composition could improve the pictorial result. The main purpose, however, was to show equipment and other things as they were, so that the photograph would supply a full pictorial description of the particular plant. The photographer in industrial plants had to use outdoor as well as indoor lighting, but where it was practicable the use of artificial light gave greater control.

Mr. Walpole and Mr. Aird gave members of the beginners class practical demonstrations of film development.

Members at the second March meeting of the Society were entertained with a Kodak film on the manufacture and use of the versatile plastic — Tenite.

Competitions resulted:
March Open: 1, R. Winn; 2, C. Collin; 3, W.H. McClung.
Stockton Outing: 1, R. Manuel; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, C. Collin and R. Filson.



1st June 1949  Page 340 - Vol. 56 No. 6 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The secret of good tonal quality in prints is recognition of the limitation of photographic paper to reproduce the tones, Mr. Geoff. Tyndall, professional photographer, told members at their meeting on 9th May.

He said that the photographer had to recognize that it was impossible for one print to reproduce the tonal range of many subjects. In exposing the negative the photographer had to decide in which part of the tonal range he wanted quality and expose accordingly.

On lighting, Mr. Tyndall urged a natural effect created by one dominant light. Nature, he said, provided one main light source which threw shadows in only one direction. Auxiliary lights could be used in photography to light shadow detail, but they should not be strong enough to create conflicting shadows.

At the previous meeting of the society Mr. Albert Chambers, of Wollongong and Mr. Frank Winn, of Sydney, discussed color photography and the processing of color film.

The Society’s competition on the Swansea outing resulted: R. Manuel, 1; A.T. Ullman, 2; C. Collin, 3.

Point score progress: C. Collin, 16.5; R. Winn, 14; A.T. Ullman, 13; R. Manuel, 12; W.H. McClung, 7; A. Stewart, 5; R. Filson, 4.5; C. Stewart, 4; C. Harris, 2; J. Lilliman, 2; S. Power, 2; W. Murphy, 2.



1st July 1949  Page 402 - Vol. 56 No. 7 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The opinion that undiluted D-72 developer gave best results for rapid Press processing was expressed by Mr. Tom Hall at the meeting on 6th June. Mr. Hall is a staff photographer on the “Newcastle Morning Herald”.

Mr. Hall’s times for development of films in undiluted D-72 were: 2 minutes at 65 degrees, 1 minute 40 seconds at 70 degrees, 1 minute 20 seconds at 75 degrees, and 1 minute 5 seconds at 80 degrees.

He said that fast processing such as was required in Press rush work produced greater grain in the emulsion, but the detail of large “blow-ups” from quarter plate negatives was often surprising. Mr. Hall illustrated his talk with examples of his own work.

In American Press work two-solution developers were popular. The first solution contained the developing agent and the second the alkali. Development times were as low as 45 secs, in each solution at 75°.

At the Society’s previous meeting Mr. Tom Jackson projected a set of slides illustrating the comprehensive application of photography. He followed with the projection of a series of 35mm Kodachrome slides selected from the collection of Mr. O.A. Sims.

The May open competition was won by T.N. Hutchens; F. Tully and R. Manuel tied for second.

Point-score progress: C. Collin 18.5, R. Winn 16, R. Manuel 15.5, A.T. Ullman 15, W.H. McClung 9, T.N. Hutchens 5, A.M. Stewart 5, R. Rilson 4.5, C. Stewart 4, W. Murphy 4, F. Tully 3.5.



1st September 1949  Page 592 - Vol. 56 No. 9 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The Society departed from its routine of photographic subjects when, at its first August meeting, it heard an address on Old Newcastle. The address coincided with the Society’s competition on local historical subjects. The speaker was Mr. Perc. Travers, Vice-President of the Newcastle Historical Society.

One outcome of his talk was a decision to conduct some future club outings in conjunction with the Historical Society.

Speaker at the previous meeting was Mr. A. Hudson, a member of the photographic staff of Stewart and Lloyds. He spoke on Industrial Photography and illustrated his talk with typical examples of photography in a major steel plant.

Club competitions during the month resulted:
Old Newcastle: 1, C. Collin; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, R. Manuel.
North Stockton Outing: 1, C. Collin; 2, J. Brown; 3, R. Manuel.
July Open: 1, R. Manuel and A.T. Ullman (equal); 3, R. Davies.

Beginners: 1, Miss R. Woolnough and B. McCabe (equal); 3, W. Penman.

Point score progress: C. Collin, 32.5; R. Manuel, 28.5; A.T. Ullman, 25.5; R. Winn, 25; W.H. McClung, 15; R. Woolnough, 6.5; F. Tully, 6; W. Murphy, 6; A.M. Stewart, 5; T.N. Hutchens, 5; R. Davies, 5.



1st October 1949  Page 654 - Vol. 56 No. 10 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The importance of using a soft-working developer for miniature negatives taken in conjunction with speed flash equipment was stressed by professional photographer Mr. J.R. Wills at the 12th September meeting.

He said that when using speed flash equipment attached to the camera, variations in the camera subject distance caused critical differences in exposure times. In fast working it was not always possible to ensure correct exposure. It became necessary, under the circumstances, to use a developer that would ensure that even the strongest highlights were not clogged.

Mr. Wills demonstrated the versatility of the miniature camera and dealt with problems of synchronization.

The address of Mr. C. Collin at the previous meeting was on the elements of photography.

Competitions resulted:
Catherine Hill Bay Outing: 1 (equal), R. Manuel and W.H. McClung; 3, C. Collin.
September Open: 1, A.T. Ullman; 2, R.N. Winn; 3, F. Tully; 4, R. Manuel.

Point score progress: C. Collin, 37.5; R. Manuel, 35; A.T. Ullman, 32.5; R. Winn, 29; W.H. McClung, 21.5; F. Tully, 9; W. Murphy, 8; Miss R. Woolnough, 6.5; B. McCabe, 6.5; J. Brown, 6.



1st November 1949  Page 674 - Vol. 56 No. 11 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Mr. Don Cameron, former member of this Society produced dozens of his own prints at the meeting held on 26th September, to demonstrate what made some photographs successful and others failures. The prints with which he illustrated his talk covered a wide range of indoor and outside subjects.

Points from his novel talk were:
PATTERN SHOTS: Greatest essential was detail of texture. Then followed tone and composition.
TREES: Principal subjects must stand out from the background and have balance. Other material in the picture must not be incongruous. Stark subjects require simple skies. White trunks against pale skies could be improved by the use of a deep filter.
LANDSCAPES: Landscape itself was incidental to the main feature. Strong shadows were generally required. Reflections were often improved by ripples easily produced by throwing a stone.

The Club’s harbour outing competition resulted:
A GRADE: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, R. Manuel; 3, A.T. Ulman.
B GRADE: 1, J. Brown; 2, N. Everett; 3, L.E. Butler.

Point score progress: R. Manuel, 39; C. Collin, 38.5; A.T. Ullman, 35.5; R. Winn, 30; W.H. McClung, 26.5; J.W. Brown, 11; F. Tully, 9; W. Murphy, 8; E. Butler, 7; Miss Woolnough, 6.5; B. McCabe, 6.5; N. Everett, 6.



November 1949  Page 724 - Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
A 47-year-old plate negative was used by the Newcastle Photographic Society Hon.Secretary, A.T. Ullman, to make his prizewinning entry for the Society’s September open competition. The subject was a 'Dutch' windmill on the English coast. Mr. Ullman combined it with a Newcastle cloud formation of 1949 vintage and produced a sepia-toned print. Judged by popular vote, it gained 34 points. More than 20 prints were on the wall, with the second award winner receiving 12 points. Mr. Ullman is the Society’s oldest member, but by no means its least active one. He, at present, fills third place on the point score, five points behind the leader, Mr. C. Collin.



Saturday 26th November 1949  Page 3 and 11 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

PHOTOGRAPHIC SHOW OPENS MONDAY
The Newcastle Photographic Society's annual exhibition will open in the Cultural Centre office in King street on Monday. The society has chosen 150 photographs from the best work of its members this year. Admission to the display is free. Members who will be represented in the exhibition are Messrs. J. Brown, E. Butler, C.E. Collin, T. Jackson, J.S. Lillyman, R. Manvel, W.H. McClung, R. Pitt, J. Ralston, C.A. Sims, F. Tully, F. Turner, A.T. Ullman, R.N. Winn, C. Stewart, C.E. Hinton, K. McDiarmid and A.J. Reedman.

Official Opening, 7.30pm, Thursday, by Mr. E.K. LINGARD.



Saturday 26th November 1949  Page 11 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY

ANNUAL EXHIBITION

TO BE HELD FROM

MONDAY, NOVEMBER 28th, 1949, in CULTURAL CENTRE HUT

THE SOCIETY HAS SELECTED ONE HUNDRED AND FIFTY
OF THE YEARS BEST PHOTOGRAPHS AND HAS PLEASURE
IN ARRANGING THEM FOR PUBLIC EXHIBITION
ADMISSION FREE

Official Opening, 7.30pm, THURSDAY, by Mr. E.K. LINGARD

Wednesday 30th November 1949  Page 3 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY EXHIBITION
The annual exhibition of the Newcastle Photographic Society at the War Memorial Cultural Centre embraces a wide variety of subjects, all of which reflect a particularly high standard.

The most outstanding example of cloud photography is that by Charles Collin — "Phantom of the Sky". The picture was taken at dusk when a cloud was illuminated with lightning during the passage of an electric storm over Merewether Hills.

"Marine Phatasy", a study of oil upon the water beside the hull of a ship, was one of the most unusual photographs in W.H. McClung's collection.

Mr. A.T. Ullman's exhibits were of a high standard. The series included some exceptionally good animal studies.

J.T. Jackson's studies in motion were very lifelike. Those which appealed most were "Youth in Motion", "The Watchers" and "Fishing".

O.A. Sim's character study "Facing Stone" showed the power and strength of the hands of a workman highlighted against the simple background of the stone.

In the color printing section a lakeside scene, "Moon light", by Roy Manuel, had particularly good tonal qualities and flower studies by Frank Tully and K. McDairmid are worthy of mention for their perfection of detail in light and shade.

NEWCASTLE WAR MEMORIAL CULTURAL CENTRE

1st December 1949  Page 786 - Vol. 56 No. 12 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
A series of photographs made with a Box Brownie within a mile of the Society’s clubrooms were shown by Mr. C. Collin at the 24th October meeting.

Mr. Collin, one of the advanced workers in the Society, produced these prints to demonstrate that expensive equipment was not necessary to produce pictorial work. After seeing the exhibition, members agreed with Mr. Collin’s contention.

The President, Mr. McClung, addressed members on the control of perspective. He said that, while perspective in a photograph was mainly the result of the viewpoint chosen, other influences were variable positions of the lens and the swing-back. Photographers should select their viewpoint with consideration for the relationship of subject matter, even if the final result meant enlarging portion of the negative and discarding of extraneous matter. The adaption of their cameras to take smaller pictures was an easy matter if they were willing to reduce the effective angle of their lens.

Something of the effect of a third dimension could be produced by atmospheric perspective, while throwing the background slightly out of focus also had a similar effect.

The October Open Competition resulted:
A GRADE: 2, W.H. McClung; 3. R.N. Winn.
B GRADE: l, E. Butler; 2, Miss R. Woolnough; 3, Miss D. Williams.

Point-Score progress: R. Manuel 42, C. Collin 39.5, A.T. Ullman 36.5, W.H. McClung 30.5, R.N. Winn 30, E. Butler 12, J.W. Brown 11, Miss R. Woolnough 10.5, F. Tully 10, W. Murphy 10.



Thursday 1st December 1949  Page 4 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

SERENITY KEYNOTE OF PHOTOGRAPHIC SHOW
The Newcastle Photographic Society's annual exhibition, now open at the Cultural Centre Hut, King-street, is a fairly quiet show but a very good one.

The serenity of nature seems to be the keynote of most pictures. Dealing with this topic, entries display a technical ability of which the society and Newcastle may well be proud. That perilous source of interest in paint or photographic - the "angle" - has been used with subtlety.

There probably isn't a bad photograph in the show but pictures worth additional note are "Seascape" by C.E. Collins, "Fishing" by Tom Jackson, "Cloud and Sand" by Roy Manuel, "July", "Marine Fantasy" and "Dune Shadows" by W.H. McClung, "Reflections" by Frank Tully and two snowscapes by Reg Pitt.

The show is following the modern trend in many things, particularly in that department of photography in which the camera is concentrated on some small and often unnoticed piece of nature - reflections, sand patterns, tree roots and grass.

This is a field well-suited to the camera, which can faithfully record the beautiful complexities of light on water as in McClung's "Marine Phantasy".



1st January 1950  Page 7 - Vol. 57 No. 1 The Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
“Familiarize Yourself With Your Meter” was the advice given by Mr. K. McDiarmid at the 28th November, meeting of this Society.

Mr. McDiarmid, former member of the Sydney Miniature Camera Group spoke on the use of exposure meters. He said that, as with cameras, members should make themselves thoroughly conversant with the use of their meters. It was possible that they might have to make adjustments in film speeds to suit their own requirements — possibly as compensation for the inaccuracy of their camera shutters.

Visual extinction meters as well as photo-electric types demanded familiarity, he said. Although the user of the visual extinction meter was faced with the difficulty caused by his changing eye conditions, the meter was nevertheless reliable. When an unusual eye condition was experienced through passing into extreme brightness or poor lighting it was necessary for the photographer to wait until his eye condition returned to normal before using the meter. The meter reading should be made within a specified time — say five seconds — because constant staring enables the operator to see a less distinct figure.

The Society conducted a successful exhibition of 126 prints in aid of the War Memorial Cultural Centre Fund.

The November open competition resulted:
A GRADE: R. Manuel, 1; F. Tully, 2.
B GRADE: E. Butler, 1; J. Ralston, 2; J. Brown, 3.

Final points in the point-score competition were: R. Manuel, 51; C. Collin, 43.5; A.T. Ullman, 38.5; W.H. McClung, 36.5; R. Winn, 30; E. W. Butler, 17; F. Tully, 14; J.W. Brown, 14; Miss Woolnough, 12.5; W. Murphy, 10; B. McCabe, 6.5; N. Everett, 6.



1st February 1950  Page 70 - Vol. 57 No. 2 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Mr. Don Cameron, who judged the Print of the Year competition at the Christmas meeting, said that the work of members had shown a marked improvement during the four years in which he had been judge. He congratulated them on the high technical standard acquired.

Members submitted 33 prints for the annual competition.

The Cyril Hughes trophy for the best print went to W.H. McClung for an architectural study inside a church. R.N. Winn’s coastal scene was second and F. Tully’s shipping study third.

Other awards were: Point score: R. Manuel, 51 points; C. Collin, 43.5; A.T. Ullman, 38.5.

Members showing the greatest advancement during the year; R. Manuel, 1; T. Butler, 2; J. Brown, 3.

Kodak Ltd. provided the entertainment program with a selection of 16mm sound films.



1st February 1950  Page 117 - Vol. 57 No. 2 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Members of the Newcastle Photographic Society adopted a novel means of expressing their appreciation of the services of the Society’s Hon.Secretary, A.T. Ullman. They each contributed two enlarged prints, which were made up into an album. The album, with an appropriate inscription, was presented at the Christmas night. A.T. Ullman has been Hon.Secretary of the society for five years.



1st March 1950  Page 132 - Vol. 57 No. 3 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The annual report disclosed a record membership of 65 at the end of 1949. The society’s major public effort during the year was the exhibition of 126 members prints in aid of the War Memorial Cultural Centre Fund.

The Treasurer, Mr. R.N. Winn, reported a credit balance at the end of the year of £4O/6/10. The society spent £98/7/10, which included £29/17/5 on improvements to club premises and provision of additional darkroom equipment.

The election of officers resulted: President, Mr. W.H. McClung; Vice-President, Mr. C. Collin; Hon.Secretary, Mr. A.T. Ullman; Treasurer, Mr. R.N. Winn; Assistant Secretary, Mr. K. McDiarmid; Program Director, Mr. R. Manuel; Council, Messrs. J. Lilliman, J. Ralston, N. Everitt and F. Tully.

Competitions judged at the January meeting resulted: Yachting competition on two outings for trophies donated by Lake Macquarie Yacht Club: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, K. McDiarmid; 3, E. Butler.

No. 2 Yachting competition on second day’s outing:
A GRADE: 1, R. Manuel; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, K. McDiarmid.
B GRADE: 1, C. Stewart; 2, J. Ralston; 3, E. Butler.



1st April 1950  Page 206 - Vol. 57 No. 4 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The importance of making individual tests was stressed by Mr. Tom Jackson in his talk to members of this Society on the production of the negative.

Mr. Jackson told of the worth of “wasting” a couple of films to achieve the correct combination of exposure and development. In testing development, he said, it was necessary to cut a film exposed under identical conditions and then develop each section in fresh quantities of the same developer.

Mr. Jackson said: “Beware of the fellow who will tell you of his secret developing formula. Aim first for the achievement of first-class results with one of the standard formulae. When the technique has been mastered, then, if you want to, go ahead and try other formulae”.

Competitions resulted: February Open (Judged by Mr. Keast Burke).
A GRADE: 1, R. Manuel; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, A.T. Ullman.
B GRADE: 1, Miss R. Woolnough; 2, J. Lilliman; 3, E. Butler.

Gully Line Outing (Judged by popular vote).
A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, R. Manuel; 3, A.T. Ullman.
B GRADE: 1, Miss R. Woolnough; 2, E. Butler.

Point score progress:
A GRADE: R. Manuel, 14; W.H. McClung, 10; A.T. Ullman, 8; C. Collin, 5; K. McDiarmid, 3; R.N. Winn, 2.
B GRADE: Miss R. Woolnough, 10; E. Butler, 10; J. Ralston, 6; C. Stewart, 5; J. Lilliman, 4; J. Brown, 2; N. Everitt, 2.



1st May 1950  Page 276 - Vol. 57 No. 5 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
“My First Year in Photography” was the subject of an address by club member Mr. Roy Manuel at the 27th March, meeting.

In his first year, Mr. Manuel gained sufficient experience in photography to enable him to win the Society’s point-score competition. He used award winning prints to illustrate his talk.

Mr. Ern Baumwald, who addressed the 13th March, meeting, detailed the history of a composite print. The finished print was an A.P.-R. award winner. It revealed a girl skier standing within a chalet and conversing with the same girl outside the chalet window.

Mr. Baumwald demonstrated how he overcome lighting and other difficulties, including the proportioning of the figures to produce the cut-out and the ultimate copy negative.

Society competitions resulted:
A GRADE: Portraiture: l, W.H. McClung; 2, R. Manuel; 3, R.N. Winn.
B GRADE: Portraiture: 1, J. Dillon; 2, Miss Woolnough; 3, J. Ralston.

Dungog Outing Results:
A GRADE: 1 W.H. McClung (“Pumpkin Pattern”); 2, R. Manuel (“Tea-Time”); 3, A.T. Ullman (“Roadside Pool”).
B GRADE: l, J. Ralston {“Old Timer”); 2 and 3, E.S. Butler (“Smoko” and “Reflections in Jigsaw”).

Point-score progress:
A GRADE: R. Manuel, 18; W.H. McClung, 15; A.T. Ullman, 10; G. Collin, 7; R.N. Winn, 5; K. McDiarmid, 3.
B GRADE: Miss Woolnough, 14; T. Butler, 12; J. Ralston, 9; J. Lillyman, 6; C. Stewart, 5; J. Dillon, 5.



1st May 1950  Page 328 - Vol. 57 No. 5 The Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
EDITORIAL VISIT
Early February saw two special functions arranged by the local Kodak Branch in association with the Society. These were planned to take advantage of the visit of the Editor and Mr. Colin Williams (of The Kodak Technical Advisory Service) to Newcastle and Maitland.

For 12th February, a field outing had been planned by Mr. W.H. McClung, Society President. This was of an exploratory nature, embracing Raymond Terrace and along the left bank of the river to Clarence Town; then by a cross-country route to Patterson and finishing with a hurried look at the flourishing town of Dungog.

As most club members are only too well aware, the mere preliminary announcement of a photographic field day is sufficient to produce rain and heavy, lowering clouds and the current occasion proved to be no exception to the general rule. The dull lighting considerably reduced the number of picture possibilities but, nevertheless, exposures in plenty were made by some half-dozen car loads of local enthusiasts.

Perhaps the highlight of the occasion occurred about half-way between Clarence Town and Patterson when “seeing-eyes” being transported by the leading car perceived, about two or three hundred yards away, one of those old structures so beloved of the pictorialist — the weather beaten slab hut with shingle roof. On closer acquaintance it proved to be every bit as promising as it appeared in the distance, and what is more, it possessed an inhabitant! — an old-timer of just the right type to provide the necessary harmonious element of human interest. As the hours were moving on, flash bulbs had to be summoned to the rescue and these did valiant service. The perfect finishing touch was supplied by the model just as we were leaving; he announced that this was by no means the first occasion that he and his domicile had received the attentions of a photographer; the previous occasion was a year or so previously when the driver of a petrol truck had been busy with his camera. Needless to say, no prize was offered for guessing the name (O.A. Sims, New Lambton) of the truck driver!

(Subsequently, an outing competition was scheduled and the awards allotted by guest judge, Mr. Cliff Noble. Outstanding prints are reproduced in this issue).

The following evening saw all gathered together again in Winn’s Shortland Hall. By way of introduction, the visitors stated that only too often had they delivered formal photographic talks from the platform and that it was quite time their contributions took a less conventional turn. The revised presentation proved to have been inspired by the modern radio technique, whereby two or more principals engage in an animated series of cross-questionings with a view to bringing out various salient points. That this new method of imparting photographic ideas and information appealed to the audience was evidenced by the exceedingly late hour to which the meeting continued. The subjects covered ranged from synchro-flash to Flexichrome and from Daguerre to the use of figures in architecture. Proceedings were given a lively touch from the start when the Editor asked Colin Williams if he had really heard aright when the latter stated that “it was high time that we heard no more of amateur photography”. The first shock over, a full explanation followed. It appeared that it was Colin Williams considered opinion that it was time that the expression “amateur", within its connotation of the dilettante and his superficiality, be dropped in favor of another title such as "The Non Professional Photographer". After all, there were many non-professional workers who had put just as much or perhaps considerably more study and practice into their photography than had their professional brothers.

W.H. McCLUNG
First, “A” Grade
PUMPKIN PATTERN

A.T. ULLMAN
Third, “A” Grade
ROADSIDE POOL

COLIN WILLIAMS
Visitor
IMPRESSION

J. RALSTON
First, “B” Grade
OLD TIMER

R. MANUEL
Second, “A" Grade
TEA-TIME

1st June 1950  Page 346 - Vol. 57 No. 6 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Two speakers who addressed the April meetings stressed the importance of unity of idea in the treatment of prints. Mr. O.A. Sims, well-known A.P.-R. contributor, spoke on the toning of prints; Mr. A.T. Ullman discussed the printing-in of clouds.

Mr. Sims said that incorrect toning would ruin an otherwise good photograph. As a general rule, prints of sunlit scenes should be toned in warm tones such as sepia, while misty landscapes and snow scenes suggested cold tones such as blues.

Mr. Ullman said that in printing-in clouds, matching was important. The direction of the light on the clouds had to be in conformity with the lighting of the landscape or other subject, the nature of the weather suggested by the main subject should be supported by the sky and the shape of the cloud should match well with the outline of the subject. If the photograph showed trees torn by the wind, the selected cloud negative should show a windy sky. The density of parts of the cloud negative was an important consideration where those parts had to be printed over features of the main subject which projected into the sky zone of the picture.

Competition results:
April 17, Open: A GRADE: 1, F. Tully; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, R. Manuel.
April 17, Open: B GRADE: 1, J. Brown; 2, J. Ralston; 3, Miss R. Woolnough.
April 24, Open: A GRADE: 1, G. Collin; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, R. Manuel.
April 24, Open: B GRADE: 1, J. Ralston; 2, J. Brown; 3, Miss R. Woolnough.

Point-Score Progress:
A GRADE: R. Manuel 28, W.H. McClung 24, A.T. Ullman 21, C. Collin 14, F. Tully 9, R.N. Winn 5, K. McDiarmid 3.
B GRADE: J. Ralston 23, Miss R. Woolnough 20, E. Butler 16, J, Brown 11, J. Lillyman 9, S. Stewart 5, C. Dillon 5, W. Penman 4.



Wednesday 28th June 1950  Page 5 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)
Thursday 29th June 1950  Page 7 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

"HERALD", "SUN", 2KO FLOOD RELIEF FUND
Donation of £2/2/- received from the Newcastle Photographic Society.



1st July 1950  Page 460 - Vol. 57 No. 7 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
With chalk and blackboard, Mr. K. McDiarmid showed members on 22nd May, how to make gadgets which would improve the efficiency of their work.

His suggestions were for the construction of:
A rocking box with a high central partition placed so that the stream of tap water fell first on one side, then on the other of the tilted partition. As water level increased on one side its weight rocked over the box, so that the water, falling on the other side of the partition, filled the other section of the box. Alternately, the sections filled and emptied through small holes in the ends as the automatic rocking action continued. Mr. McDiarmid described the equipment as providing a most efficient form of washing.

A bottle-plug arrangement which kept the water level constant for bath washing of prints and drew off water from the bottom to pass it through the plug.

A large bottle for the storage of developer with a film of pure paraffin oil on top of the developer to prevent oxidation. The cork was punctured by two glass tubes — one as an air inlet, the other with rubber tubing attached as an inlet and outlet for the developer. It was important, said Mr. McDiarmid, that the longer tube should reach not quite to the bottom of the bottle to prevent the drawing off of sediment. Before the oil level reached the bottom of the tube, the developer supply was restored.

A developer warmer consisting of a lightproof box enclosing four 40-watt lamps.

A portable lighting unit with lamps fitted inside a reflector-lined case. Split hinges permitted the separation of the sections of the case to permit the use of the two banks of lights in different positions. Diffusion screens could also be fitted.

Mr. McDiarmid completed his talk with a demonstration of Colorform toning.

At the Society’s previous meeting the President of the Newcastle Historical Society (Mr. W.J. Goold) projected a series of slides of “Old Newcastle”.

Competitions resulted: Morna Point Outing:
A GRADE: 1, G. Collin; 2, R. Manuel; 3, W.H. McClung.
B GRADE: 1, Miss R. Woolnough; 2, J. Brown; 3, J. Lillyman.

May Open:
A GRADE: 1, G. Collin; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, R. Manuel.
B GRADE: 1, R. Dillon; 2, F. Turner; 3. Miss R. Woolnough.

Point Score Progress:
A GRADE: R. Manuel, 35; W.H. McClung, 29; A.T. Ullman, 27; C. Collin, 24; F. Tully, 9; K. McDiarmid, 7; R.N, Winn, 7; T. Jackson, 2; A. Reedman, 2.
B GRADE: Miss R. Woolnough, 28; J. Ralston, 23; J. Brown, 17; E. Butler, 16; J. Lillyman, 14; G. Dillon, 10; G. Stewart, 5; W. Murphy, 4; W. Penman, 4; F, Turner, 4; J. Gain, 4; N. Everett, 2; D. Cook, 2; J. Wrigley, 2.



1st August 1950
Page 476 - Vol. 57 No. 8 The Australasian Photographic Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Subconscious instincts based on early fears influenced basic designs in art and photography, club member Ray Dillon told members at their first July meeting. Mr. Dillon based his talk on the theories of Mortensen and used that artist’s photographs to illustrate it. He said that four of the basic forms of design were the diagonal, based on an instinctive fear of lightning, the S curve, based on the fear of snakes, the triangle based on the fear of sharp points as represented by spears and the mass symbolical of the impassable object.

Open Competitions resulted: June:
A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, A.T. Ullman.
B GRADE: l, J.W. Brown; 2, H. Anderson; 3, F. Turner.

Open Competitions resulted: July:
A GRADE: l, W.H. McClung; 2, F. Tully; 3, K. McDiarmid.
B GRADE: 1, R. Dillon; 2, J. Ralston; 3, J.W. Brown.

Point-score leaders:
A GRADE: W.H. McClung 42, R. Manuel 41, A.T. Ullman 37, Miss R. Woolnough 34.5, C. Collin 34, F. Tully 13.
B GRADE: J.W. Brown 27, J. Ralston 27, R. Dillon 17, J. Lillyman 17, E. Butler 16, R. Gain 8.



1st September 1950  Page 538 - Vol. 57 No. 9 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
A talk by Press photographer, Mr. Cec. Piggott, has inspired two competitions in the society, Mr. Piggott stressed the publicity value of district photographs. He said that club members had a duty to use their cameras so that their pictures would advertise the district in which they lived.

Publicity pictures, he said, could still be made with a pictorial outlook. They should be pictures that display the life and industries of the district and reveal the particular nature of the countryside. The photograph of subject material that can be obtained anywhere, while it has its pictorial value, has no publicity value for the particular district in which it was made.

Mr. Piggott illustrated his point with a screening of his Kodachrome film, “The Hunter Valley Story”. He donated a trophy for a competition to be held later in the year for the best publicity photograph showing pastoral interests in the Hunter Valley. The President announced that his trophy would be for the best publicity photograph of Newcastle or its industries.

Club member, Mr. C. Collin, addressed members at the first August meeting on the use of Filters. He informed them that the effect of filters varies in relation to the angle of the sun. The area of sky surrounding the sun, he said, is not as deep a blue as that in the opposite direction. It is influenced by the yellow produced by moisture and dust particles in the air.

The competition for Against-the-Light subjects resulted:
A GRADE: l, A.T. Ullman; 2, C. Collin; 3, R. Manuel.
B GRADE: 1, J. Ralston; 2, J. Brown; 3, R. Cain.

Leaders in point-score progress:
A GRADE: R. Manuel, 44; W.H. McClung, 44; A.T. Ullman, 42; G. Collin, 38; Miss R. Woolnough, 34.5.
B GRADE: J. Ralston, 32; J. Brown, 31; G. Dillon, 17; F. Turner, 9; H. Anderson, 8.5.



1st October 1950  Page 651 - Vol. 57 No. 10 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
An appeal to Australian photographers to depict Australia was made to members of the Newcastle Photographic Society by Cessnock artist, Mr. Charles Raisbeck. He said that the rest of the world was familiar, through art and photography, with the typical Australian landscape with its gums, but some thing more was needed. The artist and the photographer should go into industry and show what Australians do there and in other spheres.

With brush and wash, Mr. Raisbeck demonstrated the dominant forms to express emotions such as fear, excitement, caution, oppression, weariness, warfare, pride and arrogance.

At the first September meeting, club member Mr. Tom Jackson produced a variety of modern cameras and demonstrated their merits and limitations.

The Club will stage a photographic exhibition in conjunction with Newcastle’s celebration of the national jubilee next year.

Recent competitions resulted: Animal, Bird or Insect:
A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, A.T. Ullman.
B GRADE: 1, W. Murphy; 2, D. Cook; 3, R. Gain.

Titles (in which each member was required to produce a picture for a title which he drew):
A GRADE: 1, R. Manuel; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, G. Collin.
B GRADE: 1, J. Lyttle; 2, W. Boxall; 3, J. Lillyman.

Point-score progress:
A GRADE: R. Manuel 51, W.H. McClung 51, C. Collin 47, A.T. Ullman 47, Miss R. Woolnough 36.5.
B GRADE: J. Brown 35, J. Ralston 34, J. Lillyman 22, C.R. Dillon 17, R. Gain 16, W.J. Murphy 11.



Monday 23rd October 1950  Page 1 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

Mr. Keast Burke, of Sydney, who has been made an associate of the Photographic Society of America for outstanding ability and contributions to photography, is a frequent visitor to Newcastle as a lecturer and judge in camera art. A World War I Digger, he is one of that select band who had high adventure with the famous Dunstar force in Mesopotamia and thereabouts.

KEAST BURKE

Monday 23rd October 1950  Page 1 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

JUBILEE GRANT OF £2500
Newcastle would receive at least £2500 for the Commonwealth Jubilee Celebrations next year, the Chairman of the Country Celebrations Committee (Mr. S. Haviland) advised Newcastle Jubilee Celebrations Committee last night.

The President of Newcastle Photographic Society (Mr. W.H. McClung) advised that his society would be prepared to organize a photographic exhibition at Nesca House during the celebrations.



1st November 1950  Page 670 - Vol. 57 No. 11 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
“Anticipate the result” was the advice given by Mr. Roy Manuel in his talk to the Newcastle Photographic Society on “Tone Control After Printing”.

He said that in the reduction of prints or in local reduction the worker should have another print alongside him to compare the progress of the work. The safest method of working is to reduce slightly, study the result and reduce further if necessary. Any attempt to secure the desired degree of reduction while the reducing agent is being applied is fatal, because reduction would continue and thus proceed too far. Better control over reduction is obtained if the print is reduced immediately it comes from the washing water. If allowed to dry the print will not accept later reduction with the same evenness of control.

Mr. Manuel demonstrated print reduction by the iodine and potassium ferricyanide methods.

Three Society members gave brief talks and demonstrations at the meeting held on 9th October. They were J. Brown (“Print Spotting and Etching”), W. Boxall (“Flash Photography”) and A.T. Ullman (“Print Coloring with Oils”).

Competitions resulted:
Cardiff Outing: A GRADE: 1, F. Tully; 2, R, Manuel; 3, A.T. Ullman.
Cardiff Outing: B GRADE: 1, R. Gain; 2, J.W. Brown; 3, J. Carruthers.

Floral and Decorative: A GRADE: 1, A.J. Reedman; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, R. Manuel.
Floral and Decorative: B GRADE: 1, J. Ralston; 2, R. Gain; 3, J. Lillyman.

Point-score Leaders:
A GRADE: R. Manuel 58, A.T. Ullman 54, W.H. McClung 53, C. Collin 51, J.W. Brown 41, Miss R. Woolnough 36.5, G.R. Dillon 17.
(Messrs. Brown and Dillon and Miss Woolnough, recently elevated to A GRADE, carried on their B GRADE points in accordance with the Society’s ruling.)
B GRADE: J. Lillyman 27, R. Gain 25.



1st December 1950  Page 781 - Vol. 57 No. 12 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
“In nature nothing is ugly”, Mr. Charles Collin told fellow club members at the 23rd October, meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society.

Mr. Collin was addressing members on Composition. He said that, at some time, each part of nature appeared at its best. It might be during sunlight, moonlight, mist or even rain. He urged members to appreciate the time when the subject material about them was seen at its best and to use their cameras at that time. Mr. Collin dealt with the basic forms of picture construction and used members prints to illustrate his points.

The Society’s October open competition resulted;
A GRADE: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, Miss R. Woolnough; 3, R. Manuel and C. Collin.
B GRADE: 1, R. Gain; 2, J. Ralston; 3, W. Boxall.

Leaders in point-score progress:
A GRADE: R. Manuel, 60.5; W.H. McClung, 58; A.T. Ullman, 56; C. Collin, 53.5; J.W. Brown, 43; Miss R. Woolnough, 40.5; F. Tully, 18; C. R. Dillon, 17.
B GRADE: J. Ralston, 45; R. Gain, 30; J. Lillyman, 27; W.J. Murphy, 13; H. Anderson, 10.5; D. Cook, 10; J. Carruthers, 9; W. Boxall, 9.



December 1950  Cover and Page 752 - Vol. 57 No. 12 Australasian Photo-Review

THE FONT
W.H. McCLUNG

MARINE FANTASY
W.H. McCLUNG

1st January 1951  Page 6 - Vol. 58 No. 1 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
At the first November meeting the guest speaker was Mr. E.G. Sara, a prominent architect and pictorial photographer, who selected as his subject “Design”.

An able lecturer, Mr. Sara illustrated his talk with a series of drawings showing how the theory of composition and rhythm is applied to practical photography. At the conclusion of the lecture, members were unanimous in a request that Mr. Sara should repeat his lecture in the near future.

At the second meeting, a “member’s night”, Mr. Collin spoke on the making of composite pictures by his “paste-on” method and also montage work.

The remainder of the night was taken up with a demonstration by Mr. Lillyman on his method of constructing a foot switch for an enlarger, using a discarded ceiling-type pull switch.

Competition results for the month were: Morpeth Outing;
A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, R. Manuel.
B GRADE: 1, J. Carruthers; 2, H. Anderson; 3, J. Lillyman.
Christmas Card Competition:
A GRADE: No competition.
B GRADE: 1, J. Carruthers; 2, I. Ralston; 3, R. Gain.

Point-score to end of November: R. Manuel, 65.5; W.H. McClung, 62; C. Collin, 58.5; A.T. Ullman, 58; J. Ralston, 49; J.W. Brown, 43; Miss Woolnought, 40.5.

The creative artist and the creative photographer — should not be expected to record merely the realities of life, said Sydney artist, Mr. John Lipscomb, in a recent address to members.

Mr. Lipscomb spoke on contemporary design. He said that a creative musician did not compose from the sounds that he heard about him — the sounds of a flock of sheep or of the passing traffic. A creative artist should be given the same liberty.

The creative artist who drew abstract designs in lines and masses didn’t intend his picture to convey any meaning, but he gave his work a harmony that influenced our everyday design in architecture, interior decoration, magazine covers and many other fields.

Much of the public antagonism to abstract design as a form of art, said Mr. Lipscomb, came from its acceptance of the false idea that an artist should portray only the reality that he saw.

The Society’s December open competitions resulted:
A GRADE: l, F. Tully; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, G., Collin.
B GRADE: 1, R. Gain; 2, J. Carruthers; 3 J. Ralston.

Final point-score result for the year was:
A GRADE: R. Manuel, 67.5; W.H. McClung, 64; A.T. Ullman, 62; C. Collin, 61.5; J. Brown, 43; Miss R. Woolnough, 42.5; F. Tully, 23; G. Dillon, 17.
B GRADE: J. Ralston, 52; R. Gain, 38; J. Lillyman, 32; J. Carruthers, 23; H. Anderson, 16.5; W.J. Murphy, 13.



Friday 19th January 1951  Page 6 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

MAITLAND SHOW 1951
The Canberra Photographic Society advised that several oversea participants in its jubilee salon had requested that their prints be sent to other Australian salons. One contributor from France had nominated Maitland. The society also advised that it would send a "fair-sized" box of prints for the show. The council decided to advise that it would welcome the oversea prints for exhibition at the show.



1st February 1951  Page 119 - Vol. 58 No. 2 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Frank Tully, one of the younger members of the society, won the print of the year competition judged at the Christmas meeting. Roy Manuel gained second award and Arnold Reedman third.

Former club member, Don Cameron, who judged the competition, said that the general standard of the work had improved considerably in the years in which he had been judge.

Other awards at the meeting were:
A GRADE point-score: l, R. Manuel; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, A.T. Ullman.
B GRADE quarterly point-scores: Miss R. Woolnough, J. Brown, R. Dillon and J. Ralston.v
Speakers during the year were guests of the society at the function.

Manager of the Newcastle Branch of Kodak Ltd. (Mr. G. Garside) entertained the gathering with a fine program of 16mm sound films.

Members made a presentation to their Secretary, Mr. A.T. Ullman, in recognition of his services throughout the year.



Wednesday 21st February 1951  Page 6 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

1951 NEWCASTLE SHOW
The photography judge (Mr. Keast Burke) said Newcastle Photographic Society was largely responsible for the high standard of entries in photography. "The first picture in each class is really outstanding," he said. "Industrial subjects are always difficult, but the first two in that class are fine work". Outstanding competitor in the photography section was W.H. McClung - three firsts and two seconds from seven sections. Mr. Keast Burke said Mr. McClung's photograph of a gum tree was an outstanding study and held the interest.



1st March 1951  Page 134 - Vol. 58 No. 3 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The annual report revealed a membership of forty nine — the second highest figure since the inception of the society thirteen years ago. With its darkroom already well equipped, the society concentrated during the year on the improvement of its library. The society finished the year with a credit balance of £28 after an expenditure of £99.

The election of officers resulted; President, Mr. W.H. McClung; Vice-President, Mr. C. Collin; Secretary, Mr. A.T. Ullman; Assistant Secretary, Mr. F. Turner; Treasurer, Mr. R. Winn; Librarian, Mr. J. Lillyman; Council, Messrs. J. Ralston, F. Tully, T. Yearsley and H. Anderson.

The society is planning a class for beginners which will start on 21st May. The class will meet on alternate Monday nights. The course fee will be 10/-.

Subjects, on which practical demonstrations will be given and the lecturers will be: “Equipment” (Mr. W. H. McClung), “Development” (Mr. C. Collin), “Contact Printing” (Mr. J. Ralston), “Enlarging” (Mr. J. Lillyman), “Enlarging with Control” (Mr. F. Tully), “Reduction, Intensification and Toning” (Mr. R. Manuel), “Print Finishing and Mounting” (Mr. W.H, McClung), “Composition” (Mr. G. Collin).



1st March 1951  Page 189 - Vol. 58 No. 3 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Mr. Hilton Wilkinson, Newcastle professional photographer, told members at their meeting on 12th February, that they should never use the same lighting set-up for the portraiture of serious and smiling models. Mr. Wilkinson spoke on “Portrait Lighting and Development”. He said that lights should be softer and lower for photographs of smiling models. Other wise, deep, unlight shadows would ruin the result.

He urged the use of simple lighting for the beginner. The modeling light should be set first and then the general lighting brought in to soften the shadows. In his experience, he said, he found that D-76 was the only fine grain developer that could be relied on to build-up shadow detail with prolonged development. Prolonged development with other fine grain developers built-up the contrast without strengthening to any appreciable extent the shadow detail.

The Society’s competition conducted on the Halifax Park outing resulted:
A GRADE: l, W.H. McClung; 2, J. Ralston; 3, A.T. Ullman.
B GRADE: l, H. Anderson; 2, R. Gain; 3, K.S. Smith.



1st April 1951  Page 202 - Vol. 58 No. 4 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
A blind photographer addressed the meeting held on 26th February. He is Mr. Richard Jackson of Newcastle.

Mr. Jackson demonstrated that a man who has been blind since birth can be a successful photographer. Occasional shots on his three recent films shown at the meeting may have been slightly out of focus, but every picture was correctly exposed and he does his own developing.

Mr. Jackson said that when he started out in photography he used a tape measure (with paper clips at every foot division) for focusing. Now, he has trained himself to judge the distance and direction by the sound of his subject’s voice. He knows when the sun is shining and can judge by the feeling of the atmosphere whether the light on a cloudy day is dull or bright. For development he uses a time and temperature technique, but varies development time to suit his particular subjects. Mr. Jackson’s talk took the form of an interview with club member, Mr. Tom Jackson.

Mr. Tom Jackson also gave a talk on aerial reconnaissance photography and the reading of the photographs by stereoscope.

The Society’s February open competition resulted:
A GRADE: l, W.H. McClung; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, C. Collin.
B GRADE: 1, R. Gain; 2, H. Anderson; 3, W. Boxall.

Mr. E.C. Sara, a Newcastle architect, addressed the meeting on 12th March, and said that there should be nothing dogmatic about pictorial composition. If the photographer knew the general principles of composition, he said, he was advancing on a better line than if he had no knowledge of pictorial composition. The composition of a picture should depend to a great extent on the way the photographer felt about the subject.

Mr. Sara then spoke on design. He said that design was the art of unifying or relating contrasting elements. It was the art of relating and unifying man-made order, the art of creating interesting units. Line, direction, shape, proportion or measure, texture, color and value could be co-ordinated into principles of design.

The society’s Brunkerville outing competition resulted:
A GRADE: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, J. Ralston.
B GRADE: 1, R. Gain; 2, F. Turner; 3, J. Carruthers.

Point score progress:
A GRADE: W.H. McClung, 15; A.T. Ullman, 11; J. Ralston, 9; G. Collin, 3; R.N. Winn, 2.
B GRADE: R. Gain, 14; H. Anderson, 9; J. Carruthers, 7; F. Turner, 6; J. Lillyman, 4; K. Smith, 3.

The council later elevated R. Gain to A GRADE.



Tuesday 3rd April 1951  Page 1 - The Gosford Times and Wyong District Advocate (NSW)

JUBILEE SHOW (GOSFORD) TO OPEN 4th APRIL 1951
The Newcastle Photographic Society has sent a magnificent exhibit for non-competitive display.



Thursday 12th April 1951  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

NEWCASTLE'S COMMONWEALTH JUBILEE CELEBRATIONS WILL OPEN ON SATURDAY
Council workmen have been busy erecting poles for colored lights and hanging bunting along Hunter-street. The celebrations will continue till 28th April. They will begin again on 9th May, the anniversary of the opening of the first Federal Parliament and continue till 14th May.

Functions will include
OFFICIAL OPENING: On Sunday the Newcastle celebrations as a whole will be officially opened by the Governor (Lieutenant General Sir John Northcott) at a combined thanksgiving service in Civic Park.
CONCERT: At night a jubilee concert arranged by the Newcastle Technical College Orchestra will be held in the City Hall.
SCHOOLS REHEARSE: A spectacular feature of the celebrations will be the school display next Wednesday. An estimated 10,000 children rehearsed at No. 1 Sports Ground yesterday.

EXHIBITIONS: Activities on Monday will include the official opening of the Jubilee photographic exhibition at Nesca House, arranged by the Newcastle Photographic Society, presentation of "Rio Rita" in the City Hall by the Civic Choral Society and the Social Justice Forum in the City Hall Supper Room. The photographic exhibition will be open till 28th April. It will be arranged in three sections - (l) Selected prints from Newcastle photographers; (2) selection of work from photographers of the former Department of Information under the title of "Know Your Fellow Australians"; (3) prints of international standard contributed by members of the New York Camera Club, Kwantung Photographic Society, Canton, China and English photographic clubs. The Australian national exhibition of school art work will also be officially opened on Monday in the Cultural Centre office building, King-street. The exhibition will include art work by pupils from State and non-State schools throughout the Commonwealth. It will be open till 20th April.

       

LIEUTENANT GENERAL SIR JOHN NORTHCOTT

DOB: 24th March 1890 Creswick, Victoria
DIED: 4th August 1966 (aged 76) Wahroonga, New South Wales

30th GOVERNOR OF NEW SOUTH WALES

Monday 16th April 1951  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

Judging at the Newcastle Jubilee photographic exhibition, at Nesca House, will end to-day. The judges, Messrs. E.C. Sara, G. Garside and W. Hannan, yesterday selected 22 prints by Newcastle photographers for final consideration. Three bronze plaques will be awarded in the section open to Newcastle photographers and one in the oversea entry section. The exhibition, which will be opened by the Lord Mayor (Alderman Purdue) at 8.30 to-night, has been arranged by Newcastle Photographic Society. It will continue for two weeks.



Monday 16th April 1951  Page 4 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

Jubilee exhibitions will be open to the public. At N.E.S.C.A. House the Newcastle Photographic Society will begin its exhibition, which will be opened officially by the Lord Mayor at 8.30pm. It will be open from 9am to 5pm each day until 28th April.



Tuesday 17th April 1951  Page 2 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

Newcastle School Pageant Jubilee Committee anticipates that more than 20,000 spectators will attend the celebrations in No. 1 Sports Ground tomorrow afternoon.

The program features 10,000 children from Newcastle and district schools and more than 8000 of this number will wear fancy costume when they appear in the living map of Australia and the wheat and wool dances. The pageant will start at 1.30pm and spectators are advised to be early.

Arrangements have been made for three salutes from Army six-pounders to be fired in groups of ten, 21 and 19, as they were fired when the Commonwealth was proclaimed in 1901. Firing will be handled by a gun team from Newcastle Boys High Cadet Corps and two gun teams from the City of Newcastle Regiment. The salvoes will coincide with the re-enactment of the proclamation by Newcastle Teachers College students.

TO MAKE MOVIE
Special arrangements have been made for a newsreel cameraman to film the display from the air. The Lord Mayor (Alderman Frank Jensen Purdue) said today that the Newcastle Aero Club had agreed to take a cameraman so that he could make a special film of the living map of Australia.

Last night two of the current celebrations attractions were opened officially by the Lord Mayor. The Cultural Centre hut was crowded to capacity for the school children's art exhibition of 240 paintings by children throughout the Commonwealth.

The second was the photographic exhibition arranged by the Newcastle Photographic Society at N.E.S.C.A. House. These exhibitions will run from 9am to 5pm each week day until 28th April.

FRANK JENSEN PURDUE
DOB: 1899 - DIED: 1985
LORD MAYOR NEWCASTLE 1951, 1953-1955, 1960-1965

Tuesday 17th April 1951  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

The small square copper plaques presented to winners at the Newcastle Jubilee Photographic exhibition at Nesca House last night were symbolic of photography and Newcastle. Etched on the plaques was a camera lens outline with a drawing of Nobbys inset. The drawing was suggested by the Newcastle Photographic Society Committee and executed by fellow member and artist Frank C. Turner. The inscription read "For pictorial achievement Jubilee Celebrations, 1951. Newcastle Photographic Exhibition".



Tuesday 17th April 1951  Page 2 - The Northern Champion (Taree, NSW)

TAREE CAMERA CLUB
With view to improving the standard of members work, it was resolved to send prints to Newcastle Photographic Society and the "Australian Photo Review" for criticism: Prints to be forwarded will be of the standard 10 inches by eight inches size on 12 inch by 10 inch mounts.



Tuesday 17th April 1951  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)
Monday 16th April 1951  Page 2 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

PLAQUES FOR BEST PHOTOGRAPHS
About 100 people attended when the Lord Mayor (Alderman Frank Jensen Purdue) officially opened Newcastle Jubilee photographic exhibition at Nesca House last night and presented plaques to authors of winning prints.

More than 200 photographs were exhibited in two sections a Newcastle and an international section. International exhibits were recently shown by Canberra Photographic Society, included English, American and Chinese. The Chinese prints from Canton were nationalistic in subject matter and caused much interest.

The judges were Messrs. E.C. Sara, G. Garside and W.H. Hannan.

Mr. E.C. Sara said selection of winners was difficult. After three hours inspection on Saturday morning, they had selected 26 prints for final judging yesterday which took another hour and a half.

The prints were judged for pictorial achievement, photographic excellence, composition and ability of authors to handle processes even to the extent of mounting and titling. The judges had been asked to award three plaques for Newcastle section and one for the international section, but they strongly recommended four plaques be awarded to Newcastle authors.

EXTRA AWARD
Alderman Frank Jensen Purdue said the Jubilee Celebrations Committee would supply another plaque.

Alderman Frank Jensen Purdue and President of Newcastle Photographic Society (Mr. W.H. McClung) both paid tribute to the high standards of both sections.

Mr. McClung said there may have been comment that oversea prints were superior but these prints had been drawn from an international field. It was to be expected they would overshadow Newcastle prints. Newcastle authors should learn something from the international exhibition

Newcastle section, plaque winners (not in order of preference) Were: "Morning Venture" by O.A. Sims; "Solitude" by Frank A. Tully; "Catoneaster" by J.K. Custance: "Judith" by A.M Stewart. Prints by the following were highly commended: A.E. Brown, A.T. Ullman, R. Manuel (two), R.E. Gain, F.C. Turner, C. Collin, J.K. Custance (three), F.A. Tully, W.H. McClung.

Plaque for international section: "How Green is My Valley" by John P. Delaney (England).



1st May 1951  Page 317 - Vol. 58 No. 5 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
NEWCASTLE JUBILEE EXHIBITION
A photographic exhibition, organized by Newcastle Photographic Society, was one of the features of Newcastle’s celebration of the Commonwealth Jubilee.

The exhibition, held at Nesca House, comprised 240 prints. An international section included 100 prints from members of photographic societies in Canton, New York and England. Kodak Ltd. kindly supplied fifty prints from the fine Department of the Interior feature “Meet Your Fellow Australians”.

The exhibition was opened on 16th April, by the Lord Mayor of Newcastle (Alderman F.J. Purdue). Awards were five bronze plaques designed by members of the society and specially engraved. Judges were Mr. E.C. Sara, Mr. G. Garside and Mr. W. Hannan.

Awards were:
Bronze Plaques: Newcastle Section: “Morning Venture” (O.A. Sims), “Solitude” (F. Tully), “Cotoneaster” (J.K. Custance) and “Judith Ann” (A.M. Stewart).

International Section: “How Green Is My Valley” (J.P. Delaney ARPS, APSA).

Highly Commended: “Early Morning" (A.E. Brown), “Tiger Lily” (A.T. Ullman), “Defeat” (R. Manuel), “Farm Scene (R.E. Gain), “Hilltop" (F.C. Turner), “Shadows of the Past” (G. Collin), “Blue Pool” (R. Manuel), “The Arched Gate” (J.K. Custance), “Grape Study" (J.K. Custance), “Harry” (J.K. Custance), “Cameraman” (F. Tully) and “Illawarra Sunset” (W.H. McClung).

LABEL for ACCEPTED PRINTS

1st June 1951  Page 378 - Vol. 58 No. 6 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Miniature technique involves no mysterious process, Mr. W.H. McClung told members at the meeting held on 30th April. He said that its success depends to a great degree on the care exercised in the prevention and elimination of dust.

Emulsion grain, he said, is the greatest bugbear to successful miniature photography. Factors which control grain are the type of film, the energy of the developer and the temperature of the processing solutions. The speaker illustrated his talk with 36x "blow-ups" made from portions of negatives of different emulsions processed in high-energy and fine-grain developers.

The competition for a publicity photograph of Newcastle and its industries resulted:
A GRADE: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, A.T. Ullman;
B GRADE: 1, H. Anderson; 2, D. Cook; 3, J. Tallyman.

Point-score progress:
A GRADE: W.H. McClung, 20; R. Gain, 17; A.T. Ullman, 15; J. Raison, 11.
B GRADE: H. Anderson, 13.5; J. Carruthers, 7; J. Lillyman, 7; F. Turner, 6; D. Cook, 4.5.



1st July 1951  Page 448 - Vol. 58 No. 7 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Constant revision of our technical knowledge was necessary to ensure highest quality work, Mr. Col. Shayler, of Newcastle, told members of the Society on 28th May. He was speaking on “Print Quality”.

He described a good quality print as a combination of black, grey and white tones on a textured base reproducing as near as possible the range of tones in the original subject. Contrast was the most important feature of print quality.

Factors in negative making which decided good quality were the lens, filter, developer type and temperature, development time and drying time. In printing, the important factors governing quality were paper color, texture and contrast grade and development time.

At the 14th May, meeting, Mr. O.A. Sims described in detail how he made an exhibition print. He emphasized the importance of planning a picture and showed that his best pictures had been planned from the time the idea occurred until the subject matter presented itself. He claimed that an exposure made on the spur of the moment rarely achieved the success of a carefully planned picture.

Mr. Sims passed on to members his formula for print reduction. The print, after development, is placed in the hypo until the yellow tint disappears. This takes half to three-quarters of a minute. After a quick rinse the reduction is carried out with diluted potassium ferricyanide. Because of the brief immersion in the hypo, the unexposed silver remains in the print and acts as a retarding agent, thus affording greater control. This method greatly reduces the possibility of the appearance of yellow stains.

Encouraged by Mr. Sims planning, Mr. S. Power, of Kodak Ltd., Newcastle, donated a guinea for the best-planned picture. Members must produce their pictures in September after firstly outlining their plan.

Competitions resulted: Hunter Outing:
A GRADE: 1, R. Gain; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, W.H. McClung.
May Open:
A GRADE: 1, R. Manuel; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, A.T. Ullman.
B GRADE: 1, F. Turner; 2, C. Boles; 3, K. Rodgers and J. Lillyman (equal).

Point-score leaders:
A GRADE: W.H. McClung, 27; R. Gain, 24; A.T. Ullman, 22; J. Ralston, 15.
B GRADE: H. Anderson, 15: J. Lillyman, 11.5; F. Turner, 11.



1st August 1951  Page 513 - Vol. 58 No. 8 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
A novel talk on “The Camera on Tour” was given by press photographer Mr. C.A. Piggott at the 9th July, meeting.

Mr. Piggott told of experience gained on a recent 1200-mile motor trip through north-western and northern New South Wales. Points he stressed were:
Have your camera readily available so that it will be handy for any emergency.
Wrap it in plastic or enclose it in an air-proof bag, so that it will be safe from the dust encountered on country roads.
If you are carrying processing equipment on the trip, make sure that it is well packed.
Be prepared for a variety of water qualities and take along a good hypo eliminator.

Mr. Mark Howarth F.R.A.S., of Newcastle, addressed members at their 25th June, meeting on “Photography as Applied to Astronomy”. He illustrated his talk with revealing slides made with the telescope trained on the sun, moon, planets and stars. Mr. Howarth had exposed many of the slides at his Mount Grange Observatory at Mayfield.

Recent competitions resulted:
JUNE OPEN: A GRADE: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, R. Gain; 3, A.T. Ullman.
B GRADE; 1, D. Cook; 2, T. Yearsley; 3, M. McNaughton.

Hunter Valley Publicity (judged by Messrs. C.A. Piggott and G. Garside for trophies donated by Mr. Piggott):
A GRADE: 1, R. Gain; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, A.T. Ullman.
B GRADE: 1, F. Turner; 2, H. Anderson; 3, W. Lyttle.

Harbour Outing:
A GRADE: 1, A.T. Ullman; 2, R. Gain; 3, W.H. McClung.
B GRADE : 1, T. Yearsley; 2, J. Lillyman; 3, M. McNaughton.

Point-score leaders :
A GRADE: W.H. McClung, 39; R. Gain, 37; A.T. Ullman, 33.
B GRADE: H. Anderson, 19.5; J. Lillyman, 17.5; F. Turner, 16.



1st September 1951  Page 529 - Vol. 58 No. 9 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The application of the “blurred mask” to improve pictorial work was advocated by Mr. Don Cameron at the July 23rd meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society.

The “mask” demonstrated by Mr. Cameron was an out-of-focus film positive printed in conjunction with the negative. He explained that the results obtained by dodging with the hands or a card during enlarging, were automatically obtained with the mask coupled with the negative. This mask had little effect on the printing of highlight density, but held back the printing of the shadow areas.

Mr. Cameron said that the out-of-focus positive was made by placing the unexposed film beneath a sheet of glass, placing the negative on top of the glass, and then exposing to a non-point light source. The film positive had to be under-exposed so that the negative had dominant control in the final printing. The making of test exposures on strips of film would ensure the correct exposure and development.

If the film positive were exposed to the same density as the negative, the final print would have the effect of a line drawing, devoid of half-tones.

The Society’s open competitions for July resulted:
“A” Grade: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, A. Reedman.
“B” Grade: 1, M. McNaughton; 2, T. Yearsley; 3, K. Rodgers.

Point-score leaders:
“A” Grade: W.H. McClung, 44; R. Gain, 39; A.T. Ullman, 37; J. Ralston, 15.
“B” Grade: H. Andersen, 19 1/2; F. Turner, 18; J. Lillyman, 17; M. McNaughton, 15 1/2; T. Yearsley 15; J. Little, 11.



1st October 1951  Page 594 - Vol. 58 No. 10 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
More press photographers died from heartache than from metol poisoning, Mr. Milton Merrilees told members in his address on 13th August. Mr. Merrilees is on the photographic staff of the Newcastle Sun.

He told of the frequent production of a photograph planned with consideration for composition and the consequent merciless creasing and trimming by a ruthless editor to reduce it to the only available space in a single column. Composition, he regretted, received little consideration in the choice of pictures for newspaper reproduction. Mr. Merrilees told of the planning necessary in an effort to produce new picture ideas for the illustration of the recurring Christmas, wet-day, first-day-back after-a-holiday and similar stories. He gave a practical demonstration of his work by arranging members for news photographs, shooting with a Speed Graphic and then rapidly processing the negatives in the society’s darkroom.

Club member Mr. Jim Lillyman gave a practical demonstration on 27th August, of the second-stage processing of Ansco color. His black-and-white study of the subject of his demonstration transparency won him first award in the society’s open competition on the same night. Mr. Lillyman said that some of the chemicals recommended in the process were not available in Australia, but substitutes were available. His greatest difficulty in his early color processing was the seeking out of these substitutes.

Competitions resulted:
Portrait: A GRADE: 1, W.H, McClung; 2, J. Brown; 3, R. Gain.
Portrait: B GRADE: 1, D. Cook; 2, C. Stewart; 3, J. Lyttle.

August Open:
A GRADE: 1, A. Reedman; 2, R. Manuel; 3, A.T. Ullman.
B GRADE: 1, J. Lillyman; 2, D. Cook; 3, W. McNaughton.

Point Score Leaders:
A GRADE: W.H. McClung, 51; R. Gain, 45; A.T. Ullman, 39; J. Ralston, 17; R. Manuel, 11; J. Brown, 10.
B GRADE: J. Lillyman, 22; W. McNaughton, 20.5; H. Anderson, 19.5; D. Cook, 18.5; F. Turner, 18; J. Lyttle, 16; T. Yearsley, 15.

(No member of the society would suggest that the opening condemnation of editors applied to the editor of The A.P.-R.)



1st November 1951  Page 705 - Vol. 58 No. 11 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Truth and beauty were fundamentals of all art, Mr. J.K. Custance told members at their 8th October, meeting. Mr. Custance, a former member of the Adelaide Camera Club, discussed the art of criticism.

He said that, while photographs of landscapes could be both beautiful and truthful, character studies usually came under the second heading.

In print criticism the term “unity related to the center of interest” is the No. 1 essential. Then the critic should ask, “Does the print live?” To do so, it requires attractive lighting backed up by good technique. A picture should leave something to the imagination. The misty effect of receding planes fading away in intensity in a landscape produce something of that character.

The emotional effect of a photograph is an important factor in assessing its value. Every stage of a photograph’s production should be in keeping with the character of the subject. Finally, the mounting and presentation of the print are important.

At their last September meeting, members gave themselves an exercise in print criticism. Each print in the competition for the night was subjected in turn to the opinions of members invited in accordance with a pre-determined schedule of questions.

Competitions resulted: Planned Photograph (before taking the photograph members were required to announce their subject and proposed treatment). Awards were presented by Mr. S. Power.
A GRADE: 1, A.T. Ullman; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, R. Manuel; 4, A. Reedman.
B GRADE: 1, M. McNaughton; 2, H. Andersen and T. Yearsley; 4, H. Andersen.

Beginners Class (awards were free membership of the Society): 1, Miss M. Wren; 2, J. Wren; 3, E. Norris; 4, Miss B. Hughes.

Glenrock Outing:
B GRADE: 1, K. Rodgers; 2, J. Lillyman; 3, W, Lyttle.

Point Score Progress:
A GRADE: W.H. McClung, 55; R. Gain, 45; A.T. Ullman, 44; J. Ralston, 17; R. Manuel, 14; J. Brown, 10; A. Reedman, 10.
B GRADE: J. Lillyman, 28; M. McNaughton, 25.5; H. Andersen, 23; W. Lyttle, 19; D. Cook, 18.5; T. Yearsley, 18.5; F. Turner, 18; K. Rodgers, 14.5.



Monday 26th November 1951  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

Mr. ALBERT THOMAS ULLMAN dead
Mr. Albert Thomas Ullman, 72, who died on Sunday 25th November 1951 in Royal Newcastle Hospital, was a successful photographic exhibitor.

For several years till his death, he was Hon.Secretary, Newcastle Photographic Society.

His photographic work gained success in Australian and International exhibitions. A study by him was accepted for this year's National Photographic Annual.

Till he retired seven years ago, Mr. Ullman was chief metallurgic chemist at B.H.P. Steel Works.

He was born in South Australia and in his early life, was associated with copper mining at Blinman (South Australia) and Chilagoe (North Queensland).

He is survived by three brothers, Frank (Hamilton), William (Western Australia) and Ernest (England).



1st December 1951  Page 775 - Vol. 58 No. 12 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Specialization in photography was urged by Mr. Geoff. Tyndall in a talk to members on 5th November. Mr. Tyndall, a Newcastle professional photographer, said that amateurs who specialized frequently produced better work in their particular fields than the professional whose business conditions forced him to be versatile. It was natural, he said, that the photographer who concentrated his effort in a particular class of work was able to produce better work while his photography cost him less.

Club members, Charles Collin and Frank Turner, entertained members at the second October meeting with a selection of Kodachrome slides. Mr. Collin’s slides provided a scenic record of a recent trip to Melbourne.

The Society’s November open competition resulted:
A GRADE: 1, R. Manuel; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, A.T. Ullman.
B GRADE: 1, M. McNaughton; 2, W. Murphy; 3, J. Lyttle.

Point-score Leaders:
A GRADE: W.H. McClung, 62; R. Gain, 49; A.T. Ullman, 47; R. Manuel, 24.
B GRADE: J. Lillyman, 32; M. NcNaughton, 30.5; H. Andersen, 23; J. Lyttle, 22; D. Cook, 18.5; T. Yearsley, 18.5.



1st January 1952  Page 6 - Vol. 59 No. 1 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Four members of Newcastle Photographic Society described, at the club’s first December meeting, their production of particular prints.

The print used by Mr. W.J. Murphy was of the interior of a church. Mr. Murphy’s solution to the difficult problem of reproducing detail in the leadlight windows as well as in the interior called for the use of a mask during printing. He cut the mask by care fully removing the window sections from an actual enlargement. He then used test strips to determine exposures necessary to print detail in the interior and in the window designs. Having matched the size of the enlargement, he exposed the print the shorter period for the reproduction of interior detail. With the aid of the red disk on the enlarger, he then carefully placed the cut print over the printing paper. The timing of the additional exposure with the mask in position enabled him to match the exposure perfectly in highlight and shadow areas.

Others who demonstrated their printing methods with difficult subjects were Messrs. J. Charker, J. Lillyman, and W.H. McClung.

Mr. Arnold Reedman, at the second November meeting, discussed in detail the making of and reproduction from paper negatives. He minimized grain reproduction by the use of Kodak projection thin paper for his positives and negatives. Mr. Reedman said that contrast control was important because paper negative reproduction built up contrast.

Club competitions resulted:
Second November Open: A GRADE: 1, C.R. Dillon; 2, A.T. Ullman; 3, A. Reedman; 4, R. Gain.
B GRADE: 1, J. Lyttle; 2, W.J. Murphy; 3, M, McNaughton; 4, E. Norris.

Christmas Card (for trophies donated by Mr. J. Charker, of Lorenz Camera Centre):
A GRADE: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, R. Gain; 3, A. Reedman.
B GRADE: 1, J. Lillyman; 2, J. Wren; 3, W.J. Murphy.

Point-score final figures:
A GRADE: W.H. McClung, 73; R. Gain, 60; A.T. Ullman, 54; R. Manuel, 24; A. Reedman, 18; J. Ralston, 17; J.W. Brown, 10.
B GRADE: J. Lillyman, 37; M. McNaughton, 33.5; J. Lyttle, 30; H. Andersen, 27; F. Turner, 23; D. Cook, 18.5; T, Yearsley, 18.5; K. Rodgers, 16.5.



1st January 1952  Page 55 - Vol. 59 No. 1 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY

ALBERT THOMAS ULLMAN
25th November 1951

The Newcastle Photographic Society lost a devoted secretary with the death of Albert Thomas Ullman. He passed away in Royal Newcastle Hospital on 25th November. He was 72.

After his retirement seven years ago from the position of chief metallurgical chemist at the Newcastle B.H.P. steelworks, Tom Ullman devoted his life to photography. At the Society’s Christmas night presentation to him last year, he said that he regarded the club as his second home. It was that atmosphere of friendly home gathering that Tom imparted to club meetings. His interest in the club’s quarters extended beyond the darkroom to the garden that he planted and cared for in front of the building. After club meetings, he presided over the tea urn when an informal get-together replaced the more serious business of the meeting.

Tom’s work was consistently among the best on the Society’s walls. In recent years, even in 1951 — he was among the leaders in the annual point-score competition. Although he rarely sent prints beyond Newcastle — except in club groups — his work had been hung in International and Australian salons.

He was a specialist in flower photography. Some of his work pictured the blooms in his treasured garden at the club.

But Tom did not measure the quality of his work by the awards which it gained. His satisfaction came from his personal sense of achievement in producing the effect he desired. A meticulous attention to detail characterized not only his photographic work, but also his administration of club affairs.

Although he was the club’s oldest member, he was alive always to the pictorial possibilities of a subject. He was versatile at the enlarger and right up to his death, he maintained a keen interest in experiments in effective toning and staining of prints.

Prints which he produced the day before he entered hospital three weeks before his death, won awards at the two successive meetings of the Society.

Two years ago the Society, in recognition of his outstanding services to the club, awarded him Honorary Life Membership.

One of his last thoughts was for the future of the club. His will, made shortly before his death, provided the Society with much photographic material and a legacy of £2OO.

Members will, at their annual meeting, discuss a fitting memorial to a loyal servant and a valued friend.

Tom was a quiet man. His reserve was not easily penetrated. A bachelor, he had lived for many years at a Newcastle hotel. But at his funeral the large number of men who gathered to pay final tribute to their friend bore evidence of their warm appreciation of a quiet man’s worth.



Wednesday 30th January 1952  Page 4 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

BEQUEST TO BE INVESTED
A recommendation by members of the Newcastle Photographic Society that a £200 bequest from the will of its late Hon.Secretary (Mr. Albert Thomas Ullman) be invested has been adopted by the society's council. Mr. W.H. McClung, a Vice-president, said the society would consider later the endowment of a room at the War Memorial Cultural Centre. Interest from the investment would be used to provide Ullman Memorial trophies for the annual points-score competition.

It was reported at the annual meeting that the society's membership of 66 last year was a record. It was an increase of 16 on the 1950 figure. The financial report showed income of £121/15/5, with £104/10/4 expenditure and a £17/5/1 balance.

The election of officers resulted: President, Mr. R. Manuel; Vice-presidents, Messrs. W.H. McClung, C. Collin; Treasurer, Mr. R. Winn; Hon.Secretary, Mr. F. Turner; Assistant Hon.Secretary, Mr. H. Anderson; Librarian, Mr. J. Lillyman; Council, Miss M. Wren, Messrs. R. Gain, J. Brown, J. Charker.

Winners of the society's "Spirit of Christmas" competition were: A grade, W.H. McClung 1, J. Brown 2, R. Gain 3; B grade, M. McNaughton 1, E. Norris 2, G. Dugan 3.

Members will attend a screening of 35mm films by the Editor of the Australasian Photo Review (Mr. Keast Burke) in Winns Shortland Room on 12th February.

KEAST BURKE

1st February 1952  Page 69 - Vol. 59 No. 2 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
“Marihuana”, a low-key study of a young girl drug addict, won the Print of the Year award for Newcastle Society member, Ray Dillon.

Mr. Don Cameron, who judged the competition at the Society’s Christmas night, praised the high technical standard of the thirty-five prints entered. He said that the subject matter selected revealed a changed outlook on the part of members. Many of the subjects had been carefully planned but, said Mr. Cameron, the authors had carried out the planning so well that many photographs had the appearance of lucky shots.

Second award went to Mr. Roy Manuel’s “The Silken Shawl” — a high-key character study. Mr. Charles Collin gained third award with “Getting Ready” — a study of an oxy-welder about to light his torch.

Other annual awards went to A and B GRADE point score winners, W.H. McClung won the A GRADE, with R. Gain runner-up, the late A.T. Ullman was third. J. Lillyman won the B GRADE, with M. McNaughton second and W. Lyttle third.

Mr. Geoff. Garside, manager of the Newcastle Branch of Kodak Ltd., provided the entertainment with the screening of a feature film - Jack Buchanan in “This’ll Make You Whistle”.

During supper, the President (Mr. McClung) thanked members and officials for their support during the year and wished them the compliments of the season.



1st March 1952  Page 184 - Vol. 59 No. 3 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
When Newcastle War Memorial Cultural Centre is established, the Newcastle Photographic Society will consider furnishing one of the rooms. A bequest of £2OO from the will of the society’s late secretary, Mr. A.T. Ullman, will make the expenditure possible. In the room will be a plaque to the memory of Mr. Ullman.

Until the Cultural Centre is built the society will invest the bequest. It will use interest from the investment for trophies for the annual Ullman Memorial Point-score Competitions.

The society’s annual report revealed an all-time high membership of 66, or 17 higher than the 1950 membership.

The financial report showed that revenue for the year was £l2l/15/5 and expenditure £lO4/10/4.

The society placed on record its appreciation of the retiring President (Mr. W.H. McClung), Vice-President (Mr. C. Collin) and Treasurer (Mr. R. Winn).

Officers elected for 1952 were: President, Mr. R. Manuel; Vice-Presidents, Messrs. C. Collin and W.H. McClung; Secretary. Mr. F. Turner; Assistant Secretary, Mr. H. Andersen; Treasurer, Mr. R.N. Winn; Librarian, Mr. J. Lillyman; Council, Messrs. J. Charker, R. Gain and J. Brown, and Miss Wren.

The “Spirit of Christmas” competition for trophies donated by Messrs. T. Baker and G. Dugan resulted:
A GRADE: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, J. Brown; 3, R. Gain.
B GRADE: 1, M. McNaughton; 2, E. Norris; 3, G. Dugan.

Elevations from “B” to “A” Grade: J. Lillyman and M. McNaughton.



1st April 1952  Page 249 - Vol. 59 No. 4 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Production of a successful montage in a crowded demonstration darkroom was the achievement of Mr. Cliff Noble at the meeting of Newcastle Photographic Society on 19th February.

Mr. Noble, Vice-President of the Camera Club of Sydney, gave his demonstration after a talk on montage. He appealed to members to use more imagination in their work. The possibilities of abstract work were not sufficiently appreciated amongst capable photographers, he said. Mr. Noble supported his appeal with samples of his own abstract and montage work.

Mr. Peter Ward, of Newcastle, the speaker at the 10th March, meeting, detailed the production of wash off relief color prints. He described the process stage-by-stage through the production of matched negatives, from a 24 x 36mm Kodachrome to the making of the matrices and finally the color print. Mr. Ward produced several first-class 8 x 10 color prints.

Society competitions resulted: Portrait (for trophies donated by Mr. Geoff Tyndall):
A GRADE: 1, F. Tully; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, R. Manuel.
B GRADE: 1, E.J. Newell; 2, J. Murphy; 3, J. Wren.

March Open:
A GRADE: 1, J. Brown; 2, R. Manuel; 3, R. Winn.
B GRADE: 1, E.J. Newell; 2, N. Everett; 3, A. Webster.

Point-score leaders:
A GRADE: J. Brown, 11; W.H. McClung, 11; R. Manuel, 7; R. Gain, 7; M. McNaughton, 7; F. Fully, 5.
B GRADE: E. Newell, 10; E. Norris, 8; J. Wren, 5; W.J. Murphy, 4; N. Everett, 4.



1st May 1952  Page 262 - Vol. 59 No. 5 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Newcastle pictorialist, Mr. O. Sims, believes in mechanizing part of the process of enlargement making so that he can devote his attention to other considerations.

In an address to members of Newcastle Photographic Society on 24th March, he demonstrated a new use for the Kodak Projection Print Scale. Mr. Sims used the grey scale of the Kodak disc to calibrate his enlarger to determine relative exposures for various degrees of enlargement. Having made an exposure through the disc with the enlarger at its minimum setting, he ran up the enlarger and gave the same exposure for known degrees of enlargement. By comparing the densities exposed through the scale, he was able to determine the exposure multiplication factors required for the larger magnifications. With the aid of a scaled drawing, he was then able to plot the multiplication factors for every degree of enlargement. He used the projection scale again to determine the relative speeds of printing papers.

Using the system, Mr. Sims told how he made all his test prints on small papers, using the whole of the negative with the enlarger set at its minimum point. He recorded the exposure time on the back of each print, together with notes on dodging or printing-in control. In making exhibition prints later, he had merely to note the basic exposure time and multiply it by the factors for enlargement and the particular paper. With such information available, Mr. Sims explained, he had merely to make one test exposure on each printing night. This was a check against the strength and temperature of the developer on the particular night. He found that he could easily make repeat prints, or prints in other sizes, with comparable quality.

Mrs. G. Walls of Belmont, the speaker at the society’s 7th April, meeting, gave a detailed discussion on the hand coloring of prints. While she talked she gave a practical demonstration of the work.

Competitions resulted:
Redhead Outing:
A GRADE: 1, R. Manuel; 2, R.N. Winn; 3, J. Ralston.
B GRADE: 1, W. Murphy; 2, E. Newell; 3, E. Norris; 4, B. Harvey.

April Open:
A GRADE: 1, C.R. Dillon; 2, R.N. Winn; 3, R. Gain and R. Manuel.
B GRADE: 1, E. Newell; 2, A. Webster; 3, A. Boyd.



Friday 16th May 1952  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

Mr. W.H. McClung, a member of the Newcastle Photographic Society, is the first Newcastle photographer invited to submit work for a collection of Australian photographs to be housed in Melbourne. The work of leading photographers from different parts of Australia is being gathered by the Melbourne Camera Club for the collection. The move is along similar lines to the permanent collection of representative English photographs made by the Royal Photographic Society, London.



Wednesday 29th May 1952  Page 8 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

Miss Holbrook, an American, has been appointed a dietitian at Royal Newcastle Hospital. She gave a lecture this week to women and girls at the Y.W.C.A. on the importance of food as a means of preventing ill-health. Miss Holbrook comes from Palmerton, Pennsylvania. She said that half the school children in Pennsylvania suffered defects due to poor nutrition "Australia has not so many bad habits to unlearn", she said. In the United States the way back to natural foods is a long one. There, foods have been so over-refined as to be disastrous to good health.

Miss Holbrook, who came direct from the States to Newcastle, heard that Royal Newcastle Hospital wanted a dietitian through the American Dietetics Association. She has traveled abroad a good deal, "but always as a tourist", she said. "Now I am very keen to see as much of Australia as I can as a resident. I find the country around Newcastle very attractive". Although her Pennsylvanian home was only nine miles from the Atlantic seaboard, she particularly enjoys the view from her office window at the hospital, looking out over the Pacific.

Accompanying her everywhere on her trips is a new camera. She has joined the Newcastle Photographic Society to learn how to turn out better pictures. Another new spare time interest is painting, which she is learning at the W.E.A.



1st June 1952  Page 378 - Vol. 59 No. 6 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Anticipation was one key to successful portraiture, Newcastle professional photographer Mr. W. Hannan told members of Newcastle Photographic Society on April 28. Mr. Hannan said that many portraits were marred because they were taken just that fraction of a second too late. The photographer should work up to and anticipate an expression and release the shutter just as that expression is arriving.

Other points made by Mr. Hannan were:

For preference, use a long focal length lens. If the long-focus lens is not available, shoot the picture from sufficient distance to give a pleasing perspective. Then use the enlarger to enlarge as much of the negative as the picture requires.

Except for dramatic effect, do not cross light a portrait. Be careful not to spotlight the nose and the chin.

Don’t photograph with the shoulders of the model straight across the picture. An angular position of the shoulders is better.

The eyes of the model should look straight at the camera lens or well away from it. Never photograph the model looking just off the line of the lens.

Developer control could save many a doubtful print. It could be applied by having a dish of water and a small quantity of concentrated developer alongside the developing dish. The concentrated solution could be applied with a wad of cotton wool to darken areas that could have received more printing.

Mr. Hannan said that the amateur portraitist had more opportunity than the professional for intimate photography.

The Society’s portrait competition, for awards donated by Mr. G. Tyndall, resulted:
A GRADE: 1, R. Gain; 2, R. Dillon; 3, J. Brown.
B GRADE: 1, E.J. Newell; 2, W.J. Murphy; 3, C. Stewart.

Point-score progress:
A GRADE: J. Brown, 16; W.H. McClung, 15; R. Manuel, 14.5: R. Gain, 14.5; J. Ralston, 11; R. Winn, 11; R. Dillon, 9; M. McNaughton, 9: F. Tully, 5.
B GRADE: E.J. Newell, 24; E. Norris, 15; W.J. Murphy, 13; J.W. Wren, 7; A. Boyd, 5; G. Dugan, 3.



1st July 1952  Page 440 - Vol. 59 No. 7 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
When Newcastle motorman, Mr. Moss Williamson, traveled through Europe and the British Isles last year, he decided that his photographic record should be the means of sharing his experience with others. On May 12 members applauded his fine spirit.

Mr. Williamson took 850 Kodachrome transparencies. As he motored through Europe he collected records of national music from each country. Back home he monitored the records on a tape recorder as a background for his commentary on his 500 best slides.

Mr. Williamson’s wanderings off the beaten track provided first-class subject interest. The high technical standard of his photography illustrated the changing light conditions that he had experienced ranging from the crispness of the Australian scene to the diffusion of the English and Scottish countryside.

On May 26 club member Mr. W.H. McClung addressed members on against-the-light photography. The Against-the-Light competition resulted:
A GRADE: 1, R.N. Winn; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, C. Collin.
B GRADE: 1, E.J. Newell; 2, J. Wren.

Point-score progress:
A GRADE: W.H. McClung, 19; J. Brown, 18; R. Manuel, 16.5; R. Gain, 16.5; R.N. Winn, 16; J. Ralston, 11; C.R. Dillon, 9; M. McNaughton, 9; F. Tully, 5.
B GRADE: E.J. Newell, 29; E. Norris, 15; W.J. Murphy, 13; J.W. Wren, 11; A. Webster, 7; A. Boyd, 5; N. Everett, 4.



1st August 1952  Page 508 - Vol. 59 No. 8 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
A prediction that black-and-white photography would eventually become obsolete was made by Mr. Frank Burlington of Sydney in a talk to members. Mr. Burlington spoke on Forty Years of Photography. He said, that while the technique of photography had improved over the years, photography had not made the same progress as a work of art. This was not surprising; because art was not new. The artistic quality of some of the work by photographers of forty years ago often surprised the more modern workers.

He said, that plans, still in the developing stage, would eventually give to the amateur the opportunity of producing natural color work just as easily as he produced black and white photographs today.

The club farewelled its librarian and council member, Jim Lillyman who sailed for Canada on the ‘Lakemba’. The president, Mr. Manuel, presented him with a parcel of Kodachrome film. Mr. Lillyman said, that when he had the opportunity of joining a Canadian photographic society, he would arrange for exchanges of prints between his new club and his old associates in Australia.

The Club elected Mr. B. Harvey to fill vacancies caused by the departure of Mr. Lillyman.

Club competitions resulted:
Self portrait — A GRADE: 1, J. Brown; 2, R. Manuel; 3, C. Collin.
Self portrait — B GRADE: 1, E.J. Newell.

Fassifern Outing — A GRADE: 1, J. Ralston; 2, J. Brown; 3, R. Winn.
Fassifern Outing — B GRADE: 1, J. Wren; 2, E.J. Newell; 3, A. Boyd.

Point score progress — A GRADE: E.J. Newell, (elevated from B grade and retaining B grade points), 35; J. Brown, 27; W.H. McClung, 21; R. Manuel, 20.5; R.N. Winn, 19; R. Gain, 18.5; J. Ralston, 18.
Point score progress — B GRADE; E. Norris, 17; J. Wren, 16; W. Murphy, 13; A. Boyd, 8.



1st September 1952  Page 574 - Vol. 59 No. 9 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The Newcastle Photographic Society is planning a special section for cine and color slide workers. The council of the society has prepared amendments to the constitution which it will put before members for endorsement. Recommendations provide for the entry of workers in cine and color slide photography as ordinary members of the society. They will elect their own committee, two members of which will be members of the society’s council. The cine and color slide section will meet independently but all members of the society will be entitled to attend meetings of both sections.

Members provided a showing of color slides for the meeting on July 28. The slides came from Messrs. C. Collin, "Newcastle and Southern N.S.W. Tour", F. Turner, "Bushwalking in the Barrington Tops and Cooranbong areas" and G. Owen, "Blue Mountains".

July competitions resulted:
A GRADE (Open): 1, G. Collin; 2, E.J. Newell; 3, W.H. McClung; 4, R.N. Winn.
B GRADE (Open): 1, J. Wren; 2, G. Owen; 3, Miss M. Wren.
Tree Study: A GRADE: 1, E.J. Newell; 2, C. Collin; 3, J. Brown; 4, M. McNaughton.
Tree Study: B GRADE: 1, E. Norris; 2, J. Wren; 3, A. Boyd; 4, T. Yearsley.

Point score progress: A GRADE: E.J. Newell, 44; J. Brown, 32; W.H. McClung, 26; R.N. Winn, 23; R. Manuel, 22.5; J. Ralston, 22; R. Gain, 18.5; C. Collin, 15.
Point score progress: B GRADE: J. Wren, 25; E. Norris, 24; W. Murphy, 13; A. Boyd, 11; A. Webster 7; Miss M. Wren, 5.



Friday 5th September 1952  Page 14 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

CAMERA MAY OPERATE
The work of installing the "magic eye" camera at Broadmeadow course has progressed so favorably that it is likely to be ready for the Newcastle Cup meeting tomorrow. It is hoped to test the camera on the finish of the first race tomorrow. If it is a success, the camera will operate officially on the other six races. Mr. Brian Hutton, of Sydney, who designed the camera, will be in charge of the test. At future meetings, the President of Newcastle Photographic Society (Mr. R. Manuel) will be the operator.



1st October 1952  Page 590 - Vol. 59 No. 10 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Enthusiasm greeted Newcastle Photographic Society’s decision to enlarge the scope of its activity by providing a special division for cine and color workers. Although the inaugural meeting of the division has not yet been held, thirty new members working in cine and color have joined the society. The society announced its plan at a meeting in the Cultural Centre temporary quarters, to which it invited people interested in the new activity. One hundred and thirty enthusiasts attended. The entertainment program included films on Antarctica and Arnhem Land taken by the Department of Interior and a sound film on Newcastle taken by club member Ken Edwards.

The new division will probably meet on alternate weeks to the regular fortnightly meetings of the “still” section. All members of the Society will be entitled to full benefits and will be free to attend meetings of both divisions.

Mr. Geoff Tyndall, Newcastle professional photographer, addressed members at the August 25, meeting on Portraiture. He said that the photographer regarded portraiture under two headings — to please the photographer’s public and to please the sitter. To please his public the photographer should aim at a result that would show the characteristics of the model. To please the sitter he should try to produce the picture that would show the sitter as he thought he looked.

Mr. Tyndall illustrated his line of division by inviting club members to photograph their president, Mr. Roy Manuel. He told them to disregard planning of the lighting for the informal type of picture required in the first category and aim at shooting some characteristic yet candid pose.

Results of the August Competitions were:
August Open: A GRADE: 1, R.N. Winn; 2, J. Brown; 3, C. Collin.
August Open: B GRADE: 1, E. Norris; 2, K. Rogers; 3, G. Owne.

Portraiture (for Tyndall trophy): A GRADE: 1, R. Manuel; 2, E.J. Newell; 3, C. Collin.
Portraiture (for Tyndall trophy): B GRADE; 1, K. Edwards; 2, E. Norris; 3, A. Boyd.

Still Life (for President’s trophy): A GRADE: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, J. Brown; 3, E.J. Newell.
Still Life (for President’s trophy): B GRADE: 1, J. Wren; 2, E. Norris; 3, N. Everitt.

Point score progress: A GRADE: E.J. Newell, 53; J. Brown, 42; W.H. McClung, 33; R.N. Winn, 30; R. Manuel, 27.5; J. Ralston, 24; C. Collin, 23; R. Gain, 18.5, M. McNaughton, 13.
Point score progress: B GRADE: E. Norris, 37; J. Wren, 34; A. Boyd, 14; W.J. Murphy, 13; C. Hirst, 10.



Wednesday 29th October 1952  Page 8 - The Newcastle Sun (NSW)

Miss Holbrook, from Palmerton, Pennsylvania USA, has been appointed a dietitian at Royal Newcastle Hospital. Accompanying her every-where on her trips is a new camera. She has joined the Newcastle Photographic Society to learn how to turn out better pictures. Another new spare time interest is painting, which she is learning at the W.E.A.



1st November 1952  Page 701 - Vol. 59 No. 11 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The Newcastle Photographic Society's new section for color and cine workers has already attracted a membership that has taxed the accommodation of the club rooms. Meetings of the new section will be on the first and third Tuesdays of each month. Meetings of the black-and-white section will still be held on the second and fourth Mondays.

The program for the first night of the cine and color section featured 8mm films by Mr. G. Howell and color slides by Mr. W.H. McClung.

Officers of the cine and color section are: Chairman, Mr. K. Edwards; Hon.Secretary, Mr. G. Dugan; Committee, Messrs. J. Charker, B. Silver and G. Howell and Dr. W.W. Gunther. Messrs. Edwards and Dugan will represent the section on the club council.

The club’s State Dockyard outing competition resulted:
A GRADE: 1, R. Manuel; 2, J. Brown; 3, E.J. Newell and W.H. McClung (equal).
B GRADE: 1, J. Wren; 2, Miss M. Wren; 3, E. Norris.



1st December 1952  Page 716 - Vol. 59 No. 12 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
High speed photography in which an enlargement is produced within a minute of the taking of the picture was described by club president, Mr. Roy Manuel, at the October 13, meeting of the Newcastle Photographic Society. Mr. Manuel operates the 'photo-finish' camera at the Newcastle Jockey Club’s horse and greyhound meetings.

He described the process in which race finishes are photographed on 35mm film with a special camera using an eight-inch telephoto lens. The film in the camera moves at a speed synchronized with the race speed. The exposure is made through an adjustable slot varying in width from one-thousandth of an inch to twenty-thousandths according to the intensity of the light. The film gets four seconds exposure and the paper a half-second exposure with a projection lamp in the enlarger.

At the October 27, meeting, Mr. S. Power, from the staff of Kodak Ltd. Newcastle Branch, demonstrated the 'Flexichrome' process. Club members divided to see the two stages of the process, the making of the enlargement in the darkroom on the special stripping film and the coloring which was done by an assistant.

In the Movie and Color Division of the society on October 6, Mr. F. Barrie showed the film with which he won a 'Sherlock Cup' award in the Australian Amateur Cine Society’s competition five years ago. It showed the production of high-class furniture from the felling of the tree in the bush through the stages of haulage, the sawmill and the factory. Messrs. J. Charker and J. Dugan also screened films.

A screening of the color slides of several society members provided the October 20, program. An innovation for the judging of the October Open Competition was an open discussion amongst members of the judging panel on the placing of the prints. Competition results for October:
Open: A GRADE: 1, E.J. Newell; 2, C. Collin; 3, J. Brown.
Open: B GRADE: 1, K. Robinson; 2, J. Wren; 3, J. Dwyer.

Minmi Outing: A GRADE: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, C. Collin; 3, E.J. Newell.
Minmi Outing: B GRADE: 1, C. Hirst; 2, E. Hughes; 3, Miss B. Hughes.

Point score progress:
A GRADE: E.J. Newell, 63.5, J. Brown, 51 ; W.H. McClung, 42.5; R.N. Winn, 34; R. Manuel, 32.5; C. Collin, 31; J. Ralston, 24; R. Gain, 18.5.
B GRADE: J. Wren, 43; E. Norris, 42; C. Hirst, 19; A. Boyd, 14; J. Murphy, 13; Miss M. Wren, 11; G. Owen, 9.



1st February 1953  Page 71 - Vol. 60 No. 2 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Plan your pictures, was the advice of Mr. J.K. Custance of Belmont in a recent talk to members of Newcastle Photographic Society, Mr. Custance is a former active member of the Adelaide Camera Club.

He illustrated his advice by producing a still life study. Mr. Custance said that the shape of a vase at a friend’s home attracted him. He took a pencil and drew the lines that he wanted in his picture and planned a foil to balance the main subject. Then he arranged the vase and sprigs and the lighting to emphasize the texture and the lines that he had recorded in his sketch.

Mr. O. Sims discussed the features of Kodachrome in a talk to color division members of the society on December 2. He showed the effect of using Kodachrome half a stop either side of the correct exposure, the effect of color temperature in working with artificial light and the effect of exposing the color film at various times of the day including after sunset.

He showed too how he had overcome his personal difficulties in using Kodachrome. He had to adapt his 2 1/4 square reflex to take the 35mm film and when he could not buy a pola screen he made one by cementing part of an eye shield between glasses. Mr. Sims showed several of his own slides and reviewed slides screened by members.

Mr. J. Grainger of Sydney, contributed a movie program for the society’s November 18, meeting. Competitions resulted:
Portrait: A GRADE: 1, E.J. Newell; 2, R. Manuel; 3, J. Brown.
Portrait: B GRADE: 1, K. Edwards; 2, W. A. Cremor; 3, J. Wren.

November Open: A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, J. Brown; 3, E.J. Newell and W.H. McClung.
November Open: B GRADE; 1, J. Wren; 2, W. Cremor; 3, J. Daley and J. Dwyer.

Paterson-Vacy Outing: A GRADE: 1, J. Brown; 2, M. McNaughton; 3, C. Collin.
Paterson-Vacy Outing: B GRADE: 1, J. Wren; 2, E. Norris; 3, Miss M. Wren.

Final figures for 1952 point score:
A GRADE: E.J. Newell, 73; J.W. Brown, 63: W.H. McClung,49; C. Collin, 41; R. Manuel, 36.5; R.N. Winn, 34; J.Ralston, 24; R. E. Gain, 20.5; M. McNaughton, 17.
B GRADE: J.W. Wren, 56; E. Norris, 48: C. Hirst, 41; A. Boyd, 14; Miss M. Wren, 14; W.J. Murphy.


An atmospheric shot of Newcastle Harbour won the Newcastle Photographic Society Print of the Year competition for Mr. C. Collin. A record attendance at the club’s Christmas night saw the judging of prints and slides by former club member, Mr. Don Cameron. The competition attracted a record entry of 60 prints, Mr. Cameron said that the excellent quality of the work had maintained the consistent improvement --ident in recent years.

A side-lit shot in fire-ravaged bush by R.N. Winn gained second award. Three prints — two portraits and a beach scene, by E.J. Newell shared third award. Mr. Cyril Hughes, of Newcastle, donated the awards. J. Ralston won Dr. Gunther’s trophy for the slide of the year with a shot of sucking pigs at a trough. P. Gurner’s backlit shot of children on a bushland track gained him second award. Point score trophy winners were:
A GRADE: 1, E.J. Newell; 2, J. Brown.
B GRADE : 1, J. Wren; 2, E. Norris.

A color talkie of wild life and industry in Canadian back blocks completed the night’s entertainment.

Dr. W.W. Gunther was the speaker at the last meeting for the year of the society’s color and cine division. He spoke on clinical photography and illustrated his address with Kodachrome slides.



1st March 1953  Page 134 - Vol. 60 No. 3 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Kodachrome slides photographed during a Tasmanian bush-walk by Newcastle club secretary, Mr. Frank Turner, provided material for his address to club members on February 3. Mr. Turner described equipment desirable for photographic bush-walking over mountainous country with night stops at bush huts. Although the conditions under which he photographed varied considerably the slides showed a consistently high standard.

Officers elected at the annual meeting of the Society on January 19, were: President, W.H. McClung; Vice-President and Chairman of the Cine and Color Division, G. Dugan; Vice-President, C. Collin; Secretary, F. Turner; Assistant Secretary, W. Cremor; Treasurer, R.N. Winn; Librarian, G. Lindsay; Council, Messrs. E.J. Newell, F. McLeod, J. Wren and E. Norris. Additional officers of the Cine and Color division elected at the February 3, meeting were: Secretary, P. Gurner; Librarian, G. Stock; Committee, Messrs. W. Jones, M. Dumbrill, F. McLeod and Dr. W.W. Gunther.

The annual report of the 1952 President, Mr. R. Manuel, disclosed a year of progress in which the principal development was the formation of the Cine and Color Division. The financial statement presented by Mr. R.N. Winn showed a credit balance of £49/11/- remaining after an expenditure for the year of £l38/7/1.

The January open competition resulted:
A GRADE: 1, M. McNaughton; 2, J. Wren; 3, E. Norris.
B GRADE: l, W. Cremor; 2, J. Dwyer; 3, Miss M. Wren.



1st April 1953  Page 249 - Vol. 60 No. 4 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
On February 10, members enjoyed a night with Mr. Keast Burke at the Kodak evening at Winn’s Shortland Room when our visitor presented the slides and tape recordings of “The Nation’s Tribute to Harold Cazneaux”, which was held in Sydney on October 27.

The Society drew its recent speakers from the N.S.W. South Coast and from Papua. From Port Kembla on February 23, came Leo and Molly Lyons with a collection of Ektachromes, 16mm Kodachromes and salon prints. From Port Moresby on March 9, came Mr, W. Fitness, the President of the Photographic Society of Papua. He demonstrated and discussed aspects of mounting. Leo and Molly discussed technical problems as they showed prints, transparencies and films. Much of their color work was taken and processed during their 1951 tour of Africa.

Mr. Fitness demonstrated mounting by starch paste, cut-out, cut-out with border tint and sunken mount processes. His sunken mount demonstration showed the simplicity of using a spoon handle to achieve an embossed mount effect on a print made with a broad margin.

On March 3, Mr. P. Ward, of Newcastle, demonstrated to the Color Division of the Society the making of Dye Transfer color prints. He showed samples of work at the various stages of the process.

The Society’s Open competition for March resulted:
A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, E. J. Newell; 3, E. Norris.
B GRADE: 1, P. Gurner; 2, C. Hurst; 3, J. Dwyer.

Members of the Society won most of the awards in the photographic section of Newcastle Show. Mr. Leo Lyons, who judged the section, made the following awards:
Landscape or Tree Study: 1, O.A. Sims; 2, E. J. Newell.
Seascape or River Scene: l, W.H. McClung; 2, E. Norris.
Portrait or Child Study: 1, E.J. Newell (best print in show); 2, W.J. Murphy.
Newcastle Industry or Shipping: l, C. Collin; 2, J. Wren.
Any Other Subject: 1, M. J. McNaughton; 2, N. Ozolins.
Most Unusual Photograph: l, M. J. McNaughton; 2, G. Collin.
Enlargement with Contact Print Attached: 1, C. Collin; 2, J. Wren.
Local Class (Six contact prints on one mount): 1, G. W. Walker; 2, D. Endean.



1st May 1953  Page 265 - Vol. 60 No. 5 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
When our society member Eric Newell wanted a colorful sunset shot on a colorless day he exposed his Kodachrome through an orange filter; he shot again using a red filter. That was the start of an adventure in Kodachrome in which he set out deliberately to break the rules. He shot Daylight Kodachrome at sunset and used a blue correction filter to balance the dominantly yellow light. He shot Type A Kodachrome at the same time without any filter and speculated many other exposures not strictly in accordance with the Kodachrome data sheets and most of his shots were successful. Those that were not, produced some evidence of the limitations of the particular types of color film. Mr. Newell’s experience produced useful material for his talk to members on March 17. He screened his transparencies — successful and otherwise — to illustrate his talk.

At the meeting on 23rd March, Mr. T. Ninness, artist and president of Newcastle Art Society, discussed the place of the camera in the field of art. He said that the photographer could learn from the artist in simplifying his subject material. The eye could not take in a mass of subject matter. The simplicity of posters had a lesson for the photographer. The photographer, he said, should stress emotional appeal in his work as the artist did. When he could do that, his work had its place in art.

The month’s competitions resulted: Color Slide (landscape or seascape): 1, M. Jones, "Tully Falls, Queensland"; 2, V.H. Pullen, "Merewether Beach", 3, D.J. Summers, "Paterson River".
Arcadia Vale Outing, A GRADE: 1, W.A. Cremor; 2, J. Wren; 3, W.H. McClung.



1st June 1953  Page 330 - Vol. 60 No. 6 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The Newcastle Photographic Society stimulated interest in its quiz program on May 5. Members of the color and movie section of the society found the seating arranged in two divisions. Each division asked the other questions alternatively. The resulting competition provoked members into a spirited discussion that produced information on a variety of problems.

On 21st April, advanced movie-making member, Mr. F. Barrie, screened his first and his latest films. The contrast in standards provided a practical lesson in improving home movies.

Professional photographer Mr. Hilton Wilkinson, on 13th April, discussed the characteristics of all well known negative developers. He explained the advantages of the different developers for a variety of work.

To demonstrate the effect of filters, on 27th April, club member, Mr. Charles Collin, screened a series of landscape color slides. He discussed the effect of various filters, had the scenes been photographed on pan film.

The society will stage an exhibition at Newcastle City Hall in September in conjunction with the annual floral carpet display. Proceeds will go to the War Memorial Cultural Centre fund.

Recent competitions resulted:
Portrait: B GRADE: 1, M. Jones; 2, J. Dwyer; 3, C. Hurst.

April Open: A GRADE: 1, J. Wren; 2, C. Collin; 3, E.J. Newell.
April Open: B GRADE: 1, W. Cremor; 2, M. Jones; 3, J. Dwyer.
April Open: C Grade: 1, N. Kidd; 2, Miss J. Connolly; 3, E. Robertson.
Floral Slide: 1, F. Turner; 2, P. Gurner; 3, E.J. Newell.



1st July 1953  Page 392 - Vol. 60 No. 7 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
An amateur producing an enlargement for exhibition should be satisfied that, in technical quality, it was the best print that could be produced from that particular negative, Mr. Don Cameron told members of Newcastle Photographic Society on June 8.

Mr. Cameron, a former member of the society, said that the pattern of enlargement making was so well defined that there was no excuse for an enlargement of poor technical quality. In control and other respects, he said, there was the opportunity for work according to the individual taste. It was in this particular work that one amateur could excel over another.

Mr. Cameron divided his talk on Making the Best Enlargement into three stages. He demonstrated the making of test strips and the production of the best straight print from his sample negative. Then he showed how the result, although technically satisfactory, could be improved by controlled printing. In the third stage he used elongation by tilting the negative and paper to stress the main line in the composition.

On May 11, four members demonstrated the operation of their particular cameras and stressed their advantages. The speakers were E. Newell (twin reflex), C. Collin (quarter-plate); F. Turner (Leica) and W.H. McClung (Contax).

Newcastle professional photographer, Mr. S. Friedman, entertained members of the cine division on May 18, with a showing of Kodachrome films of his recent world tour. He said that Australian standards of processing compared most favorably with processing in other countries.

Mr. C. Collin, on June 1, discussed Fundamentals of Color Photography and showed a selection of recent slides.

Competitions resulted:
Color Slide Portrait: 1, F. Turner; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, J. Ralston.
Action Shot, for trophies donated by Mr. J. Charker:
A GRADE: 1, W.H. McClung; 2, J. Wren; 3, E. Norris.
B GRADE: 1, J. Dwyer; 2, R. Dickenson; 3, N. Kidd.
Animal, Bird or Insect: A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, N. Ozolins; 3, J. Wren.
Animal, Bird or Insect: B GRADE : 1, N. Foster; 2, J. Dwyer; 3, E. Robertson.

Point score leaders:
A GRADE: J. Wren, 23; C. Collin, 14; W.H. McClung, 13; E. Norris, 11; E. Newell, 8.
B GRADE: J. Dwyer, 23; W. Cremor, 16; N. Kidd, 10; M. Jones, 9; E. Robertson, 6.



Thursday 2nd July 1953  Page 5 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

FESTIVAL PLANS COMPLETE
The program for Newcastle's Floral Festival this year had been completed, the Chairman of the Festival Committee (Alderman Terry) said yesterday. Alderman Terry said one of the chief features would be the home gardens contest for which 1000 entries were being sought. The committee was also applying to the City Council for £75, to be used as prizes for the best kept footpaths. The program would include concerts, flower shows, ballet, parades, films, revue company contests and an exhibition by the Newcastle Photographic Society.

The Newcastle Photographic Society exhibition, City Hall supper room on the 7th, 8th and 9th September, from 10am to 10pm.



1st August 1953  Page 507 - Vol. 60 No. 8 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Mr. John Kubelka, a New Australian, told members of Newcastle Photographic Society on June 22, of the latest advances of photography in the field of electronics. He discussed developments in high-speed flash and in the conversion of infra-red and ultra-violet light to visible light.

The Cine and Color Division of the society heard a discussion on optics at the June 15, meeting. The speakers were Mr. G. Pritchard and society members, Messrs. R. Manuel and W.H. McClung.

On July 6, the chairman of the division, Mr. G. Dugan, gave a practical demonstration of the mechanism of movie cameras and projectors. Competitions resulted:
June Open: A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, N. Ozolins; 3, E. Newell.
June Open: B GRADE: 1, C. Hirst; 2, N. Foster; 3, J. Daley.
June Open: C Grade: 1, N. Tacon; 2, W. Frazer.
Color Slide — Shipping and Industrial: 1, J. Ralston; 2, F. Turner; 3, L. Fridrych; 4, W. Gunther.

The society will stage an exhibition in September in conjunction with Newcastle’s Floral Festival. Proceeds will go to the War Memorial Cultural Centre Fund.



1st September 1953  Page 523 - Vol. 60 No. 9 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The exposure of Kodachrome was a matter of personal taste as well as consideration of the limitations of the film, Mr. Frank Tully told members of the color division of Newcastle Photographic Society on August 3. Mr. Tully is a member of the Kodak organization at Newcastle.

He said that an important consideration in determining the exposure was the power of the lamp in the projector which would display the slides. Photographers with a high-powered lamp in their projectors could keep their exposures on the short side. The slides would have a richer color but the higher penetration of the projector light would counter their density. In determining exposure for Kodachrome, he said, it was necessary to disregard the shadow areas because it was only the highlit area of the picture that produced the color.

On July 27 Mr. Garth Pritchard, a Newcastle camera technician, addressed the society on the care of photographic equipment. While he said that care was mainly a matter of common sense, he detailed the lesser-known pitfalls that could mar pictures. Dust, moisture and abuse, he said, were the worst enemies.

The Society discussed the purchase of new club quarters at an initial cost of £8OO but rejected the proposal because of restrictions imposed on the proposed quarters by the Northumberland County Council. Enlargement of the existing club rooms on the Pacific Highway, Adamstown, is now under review.

Members accepted with regret the resignation of Mr. G. Dugan as chairman of the color and cine division. They elected Mr. M. Dumbrill to the position.

Competitions resulted:
Night Outing: A GRADE: 1, W. Cremor; 2, J. Wren; 3, E. Newell.
Night Outing: B GRADE: 1, J. Daley; 2, W. Frazer; 3, Miss J. Connolly.
July Open: A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, E. Newell; 3, N. Ozolins.
July Open: B GRADE: 1, M. Jones; 2, Miss M. Wren; 3, N. Foster.
July Open: C Grade: 1, C. Tacon; 2, R. Summers.
Child Study Color Transparency: 1, V. Pullin; 2, C. Collin; 3, N. Keats.



Friday 4th September 1953  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

FESTIVAL OPENS WITH FLOWERS
Newcastle Floral Festival will begin to day with a flower show at the City Hall. The show will be officially opened by the Lady Mayoress (Mrs Purdue) at 2.30pm. It will continue till 10pm tomorrow.

PHOTO DISPLAY
The festival will continue on Monday with the opening of the Newcastle Photographic Society's exhibition at the City Hall. This display will be open from 10am to 10pm till 9th September. It will include 60 photographs on loan from the Australasian Photo Review. They are prizewinning studies and include 20 under the heading "River Canoe Club" and "Man From Snowy River".



Friday 4th September 1953  Page 2 and 12 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)
Monday 7th September 1953  Page 7 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)
Tuesday 8th September 1953  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

200 PHOTOGRAPHS EXHIBITED
About 200 photographs are being exhibited by Newcastle Photographic Society in Newcastle City Hall Supper Room as part of the Newcastle Floral Festival. The exhibition, which began yesterday, will be open from 10am to 10pm today and to-morrow. About 100 photographs have been submitted by Newcastle photographers. The rest are on loan from Sydney. Mr. E.C. Sara gave a criticism last night on some of the Newcastle entries.

NEWCASTLE CITY HALL

1st October 1953  Page 633 - Vol. 60 No. 10 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Three loan collections provided by the Editor of The A.P.-R. augmented the Newcastle Photographic Society exhibition at the Newcastle Town Hall on September 7, 8 and 9. The Society staged the exhibition as a floral Festival function in aid of the funds of the War Memorial Cultural Centre. The centre is planned to house an auditorium, art gallery, public library and conservatorium. Tenders for the first stage of the work will be invited within a month. The photographic exhibition comprised 232 prints. The Kodak loan prints exhibited included a group of A.P.-R. award winners, a collection featuring activities of the Canoe Club of N.S.W., and a News and Information Bureau Series under the intriguing title of "The Man from Snowy River". Society members met at the City Hall on September 7, when Mr. E.C. Sara criticized Newcastle prints in the exhibition.

On August 24th Mr. J. Charker addressed members of the black-and-white section of the society on exposure and exposure meters. He showed every basic type of exposure meter and discussed their merits and limitations.

Mr. A. Emerton addressed members of the color and movie division on August 17, on Script-writing for Movies. He described as essentials, simplicity of story and preparation of a detailed plan of the script. He said that cutting of a film should be done without fear and if any shot called for an apology, it should be eliminated.

Competitions during the month resulted;
Pictorial Shot of Newcastle: (for trophies donated by Mr. J. Charker):
A GRADE; 1, N. Ozolins; 2, C. Collin; 3, J Wren.
B GRADE: 1, J. Daley; 2, N. Tacon; 3, Miss J. Connolly.
Norah Head Outing: A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, E.J. Newell; 3, R. Gain.
Norah Head Lighthouse: (for trophy donated by Mr. R. Manuel): 1, E.J. Newell; 2, R. Gain.

August Open: A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, E.J. Newell; 3, C. Collin.
August Open: B GRADE: 1, N. Kidd; 2, J. Dwyer; 3, E. Robertson.
August Open: C Grade: 1, N. Tacon; 2, J. Rae.
Animal Study Color Slide: 1, J. Vincent; 2, G. Collin; 3, W.H. McClung.

Point Score Leaders:
A GRADE: C. Collin, 37; J. W. Wren, 33; E. J. Newell, 26; W. Cremor, 23; N. Ozolms, 21; W.H. McClung, 15; E. Norris, 14.
B GRADE: J.A. Dwyer, 28; J. Daley, 17; N. Kidd, 17; M. Jones, 14; C. Hirst, 12; N. Foster, 12; E. Robertson, 10.

Color Division: F. Turner, 14; V.H. Pullen, 10; J. Ralston, 9; C. Collin, 8; W.H. McClung, 7; M. Jones, 5; J. Vincent, 5; P. Gumer, 5.



1st November 1953  Page 656 - Vol. 60 No. 11 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Mr. Frank Tully, a member of Kodak’s Newcastle staff produced 20 exhibition prints when he addressed Newcastle Photographic Society on September 28, on Quality in Enlargements. The standard of his work left no doubt on his qualifications to give the talk. Many of the prints had competed successfully in overseas salons. Mr. Tully told members that the enlargement was only the start in the process of making a picture. “The first essential of any salon print is quality” he said. “We owe it to the judges to give them the best of our ability. A print must have sparkle, it must have good carrying power and it must have the ability to catch the eye”. Mr. Tully described the process of dry local reduction using a solution of methyl alcohol, iodine and thiocarbamide. The process permits control in fine print detail. He detailed the print finishing control used on each of his exhibition prints.

Members of the color division on September 14, saw a display of 3-D color work by Mr. J. Novak. Mr. Novak showed slides by viewer and projection. Members of the audience used polaroid glasses to view the projected slides in third dimension. He discussed the history of 3-D photography and with the aid of sketches, showed how systems had been adapted for theatre screening.

The movie division of the club on September 21, reviewed cine films contributed by members. Competitions, resulted:
Glenrock Outing: A GRADE; 1, W.H. McClung; 2, N. Ozolins; 3, W. Cremor.
Glenrock Outing: B GRADE; 1, N. Tacon; 2, N. Kidd; 3, R. Dickinson.
Color Slides: Tree Study: 1, C. Collin; 2, E. J. Newell; 3, G. Stock.
Norah Head Outing: 1, C. Collin; 2, F. Turner; 3, F. McLeod.
Movie (limited to 400 ft., 16mm or 200 ft., 8mm): 1, F. Barrie; 2, W.H. McClung; 3, J. Christianson.

Point Score Progress:
A GRADE: C. Collin, 38; J. Wren, 33; W. Cremor, 26; E. J. Newell, 26; N. Ozolins, 25; W.H. McClung, 20; E. Norris, 14.
B GRADE: J. Dwyer, 28; N. Tacon, 19; J. Daley, 17; N. Kidd, 16; M. Jones, 14; N. Foster, 12; C. Hirst, 12; R. Dickinson, 10; B. Robertson, 10; Miss J. Conolly, 8; W. Frazer, 8; Miss M. Wren, 7.
Color Slides: F. Turner, 18; C. Collin, 18; V. Pullen, 10; J. Ralston, 9; W.H. McClung, 7; M. Jones, 5; G. Stock, 4; N. Keats, 3.



1st December 1953  Page 719 - Vol. 60 No. 12 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The need for caution in print control by reduction was urged by Newcastle Photographic Society member, Mr. Roy Manuel, in his address to members on October 12. Mr. Manuel, a consistent exponent of successful print reduction said; “Ferricyanide reduction is reliable if you use it properly. But do not make the solution too strong and do not force the result. As soon as you can see something happening, wash the print, then inspect the result. If you can see the result you want while the print is still in the reducing solution, you might as well throw the print away because your solution has been too strong”.

On October 26, Mr. Paul Beadle, Art Director at the Newcastle Technical College, discussed Composition as Applied to Art. He dealt with the license of the artist as opposed to the scope of the photographer.

Members of the Cine and Color Division on November 2, saw 2200 feet of Kodachrome photographed by Mr. Galloway of Kurri on a recent tour of Central Australia. Mr. Galloway achieved a talkie effect by using a tape recorder to synchronize a commentary and musical background.

Competitions during the month resulted:
St. Andrew’s Church (for trophies donated by Mr. E.J. Newell):
A GRADE: 1, W. Cremor; 2, N. Ozolms; 3, C. Collin.
B GRADE: 1, E. Kimble; 2, N. Tacon; 3, N. Kidd.

October Open: A GRADE; 1, E.J. Newell; 2, E. Norris; 3, N. Ozolins.
October Open: B GRADE: 1, N. Tacon; 2, W. Frazer; 3, Mrs. N. Tacon.

Color Slide Open: 1, G. Stock; 2, Mrs. M. Fidrych; 3, L. Fidrych.

Point Score Leaders:
A GRADE; C. Collin, 42; J. Wren, 35; N. Ozolins, 32; W. Cremor, 32; E. Newell, 31; W. McClung, 20; E. Norris, 18.
B GRADE; J. Dwyer, 28; N. Tacon, 28; N. Kidd, 25; J. Daley, 17; M. Jones, 14; N. Foster, 12; W. Frazer, 12; C. Hirst, 12; E. Robertson, 11; R. Dickinson, 11.
Color Slides: F. Turner, 18; C. Collin, 18; V.Pullen, 11; J. Ralston, 9; G. Stock, 9; E. Newell, 7; W. McClung, 7; J. Vincent, 6; M. Jones, 5; L. Fidrych, 4; Mrs. M. Fidrych, 3; N. Keates, 3.



1st February 1954  Page 117 - Vol. 61 No. 2 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
An early-morning river scene with a wintry atmosphere won Newcastle Photographic Society Print of the Year award for Charles Collin. Mr. Collin was the outstanding exhibitor of the Club’s year. In addition to gaining the Print of the Year, he won the A GRADE black-and-white and color slide point scores and gained third award in the Slide of the Year contest.

Mr. Don Cameron judged the Print of the Year at the Society’s Christmas Night on December 21. He gave second award to a study of two cats by W.H. McClung and third award to a self portrait by E.J. Newell. A study of brick arches in a garden setting, photographed by G. Stock, was awarded the Slide of the Year by the judge, Mr. G. Garside. He gave second award to club secretary Frank Turner’s landscape photographed in late afternoon light and third award to Charles Collin’s lakeside shot with a stormy sky backdrop.

Point-score awards for the year were:
A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, N. Ozolins; 3, J. Wren.
B GRADE: 1, N. Tacon; 2, N. Kidd; 3, J. Dwyer.
Color Slide: 1, C. Collin; 2, F. Turner; 3, G. Stock.

The annual report disclosed that in 1953, for the first time in the Club’s history, membership exceeded 100.

The world champion swimmer, John Davies and an American, Lee Fidrych, entertained members of the Color Section on December 7, with a showing of color slides, Mr. Davies slides featured scenes in the U.S. and at the last Olympic Games in Helsinki. Mr. Fidrych’s slides showed some of the features of Australia that impressed an American visitor.

On December 14, Mr. Frank Tully, a member of the Kodak Newcastle staff, addressed the Society on the Flexichrome process. He said that the process was so simple that anyone following the directions could produce first-class Flexichrome prints. The negative needed was one that would produce a print without any stark white area.



Friday 12th February 1954  Page 16 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

CAMERA MAN GIFTED
Mr. Roy Manuel, camera-finish operator at Broadmeadow racecourse, has been interested in photography only since October, 1949. He bought a box camera as a present for his wife's birthday, but became an enthusiastic photographer himself. Two months later, without tuition, he won the Newcastle Photographic Society's A grade competition with an enlargement the first he had made. Early in 1950 he won the "Australasian Photo Review" A grade competition. He has since had hangings accepted in the International Salon. Till last year he was President of Newcastle Photographic Society.



Friday 26th February 1954  Page 2 - Newcastle Morning Herald and Miners Advocate (NSW)

Competitors were not always good judges of their own work, as was proved by Mr. W.H. McClung, a Newcastle journalist whose hobby is photography. Mr. McClung turned cameraman to good effect and won three firsts and champion photograph in the photographic section at the show. One of the winning entries was almost left out because he thought it was not good enough. Mr. McClung features in another way in the exhibition, he appears in a picture submitted by fellow Newcastle Photographic Society member, Mr. E.J. Pewell in a section won by one of Mr. McClung's own entries.



1st April 1954  Page 200 - Vol. 61 No. 4 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The Newcastle Photographic Society is to make its first movie. Members of the Cine Division of the Society are discussing scenarios and will go into action when they have made a selection. The film will become the property of the club and will be available to members on loan.

Mr. J. Metcalfe, well-known salon judge of Sydney, discussed the judging of prints at the Society’s meeting on February 22. He expressed the opinion that the salon worker of today, helped by the standardization of techniques, did not put the same effort into his work as the photographer of earlier years. On March 1, Mr. J. Cowan, a member of the Society, gave the Color and Cine Division a screening of Kodachromes taken on a recent overseas tour. Mr. Cowan went to Europe via Suez and returned via Panama. He visited 32 countries.

Officers of the Society for 1954 are: President, Mr. R. Manuel; Vice-Presidents, Messrs C. Collin and A.W. Dumbrill; Hon.Secretary, Mr. J. Charker; Assistant Secretary, Mr. F. Turner; Treasurer, Mr. R.N. Winn; Librarian, Mr. E. Norris; Council, Messrs N. Tacon, W. Cremor, J. Wren and J. Rae. Cine and Color Division: Chairman, Mr. A.W. Dumbrill; Hon.Secretary, Mr. R. Ryan; Librarian, Mr. G. Smith; Committee, Messrs. J. Novak, S. Jones, G. Smith and B. Harvey.

Competitions resulted:
JANUARY OPEN:
A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, E. Kimble; 3, N. Tacon.
B GRADE: 1, J. Rae; 2, Mrs. S. Tacon; 3, N. Kidd.
STROUD OUTING:
A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, W. Cremor; 3, J. Ralston.

FEBRUARY OPEN:
A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, N. Tacon; 3, J. Wren.
B GRADE: 1, J. Rae; 2, Mrs. S. Tacon; 3, N. Kidd.
MALE PORTRAIT: A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, K. Edwards; 3, W. Cremor.

CINE AND COLOR DIVISION:
FEBRUARY OPEN: 1, J. Novak; 2, R.N. Winn; 3, G. Stock.
LANDSCAPE: 1, N. Keates; 2, J. Vincent; 3, R.N. Winn.



1st May 1954  Page 261 - Vol. 61 No. 5 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The Queen had learned to refrain from blinking when a photographer’s flash bulb ignited before her eyes, Mr. Alan Hoysted told members of Newcastle Photographic Society on March 22. Mr. Hoysted, a Newcastle Press photographer covered the Royal Tour of the State for Australian United Press. He said that, had the Queen blinked as most people do when they are photographed by flash, many of the pictures would have shown her with eyes closed. Although many flash bulbs were fired in quick succession at night and indoor functions, he had not heard of any Press photographer on tour in N.S.W. who had got a shot of the Queen with her eyes closed.

Another achievement of the Queen, said Mr. Hoysted, was her ability to give that subtle change of expression that made each photograph distinctive. This was one of the characteristics of the successful photographic model. The Queen was helpful to the photographers on the Royal Tour and often paused momentarily so that they could get their pictures.

Mr. A.W. Dumbrell, Chairman of the Movie Section of the Society, addressed section members on March 15, on Movie Titling. He demonstrated his home-made titler and showed films titled with its use. He also showed his method of titling on glass so that scenes characteristic of the film could be passed behind the lettering of the title.

Competitions resulted: March Open Subject:
A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, E. Kimble; 3, W. Cremor.
B GRADE : 1, J. Rae; 2, Mrs. S. Tacon; 3, E. Robertson and N. Kidd.
Color Section: Gresford and Stroud Outings: 1, J. Vincent; 2, J. Ralston; 3, R. Winn.
April Open Subject: 1, J. Cowan; 2, V. Pullen; 3, A.W. Dumbrell.

Point Score Progress:
A GRADE: N. Ozolins, 20; W. Cremor, 12; E. Kimble, 9; N. Tacon, 8; C. Collin, 5; J. Ralston, 4; J. Wren, 3.
B GRADE: J. Rae, 16; Mrs. S. Tacon, 12; N. Kidd, 8; E. Robertson, 3.
Color Section: R.N. Winn, 16; J. Vincent, 10; J. Ralston, 7; J. Novak, 6; N. Keats, 6; J. Cowan, 6; G. Smith, 5.



1st June 1954  Page 380 - Vol. 61 No. 6 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
An exhibitor at a photographic society should present his print with the same care that he would give it were he sending it to a London salon, Mr. Frank Tully told members of Newcastle Photographic Society on April 26. Mr. Tully, a member of the Kodak Newcastle staff, discussed the presentation of prints. He said that dry mounting produced the best results but the cut-out mount permitted the print to be replaced and the mount used again. He expressed the opinion that every print should have a title. A print without a title, he said, was like a book without a title.

Mr. Ken Dodds, a Newcastle technician of the P.M.G. Department, addressed members on April 12 on the transmission of pictures by wire. He said that pictures were transmitted not as a whole as in television but by the electrical impulse from reflected light as the cylinder holding the picture turned and traversed under a concentrated beam of light. The turning was at the rate of one revolution a second and the traverse at the rate of one-hundredth of an inch per revolution. Transmission of a 8" by 10" photograph took from 13 to 15 minutes.

On May 3, Mr. Ron Browne entertained members of the Cine Division with the screening of his films of the Gosford district.

Competitions for the month resulted: April Open:
A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, J. Ralston; 3, N. Tacon.
B GRADE: 1, W. Frazer; 2, Mrs. S. Tacon and W. Moxham equal.
Female Portrait: A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, K. Edwards; 3, W.H. McClung.
Female Portrait: B GRADE: 1, W. Frazer; 2, J. Rae; 3, W. Moxham.
Color Division: Seascape: 1, J. Cowan; 2, J. Novak; 3, C. Parsons.

Point Score Progress:
A GRADE: N. Ozolins 30, W. Cremor 13, N. Tacon 12, E. Kimble 10, J. Ralston 8; K. Edwards 8, C. Collins 5.
B GRADE: J. Rae 21, Mrs. S. Tacon 16.5, W. Frazer 10, N. Kidd 9, W. Moxham 6.5.
Color Slides: R.N. Winn 17, J. Cowan 11, J. Vincent 11, J. Novak 10, J. Ralston 7, N. Keates 6, G. Smith 5, C. Parsons 5, V. Pullen 5.



1st July 1954  Page 398 - Vol. 61 No. 7 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Print quality started not with the negative but with the camera, Mr. J. Brown told members of Newcastle Photographic Society at their May 10, meeting. Lens quality was important, he said, and a lens hood should always be used. The lens should be focused accurately and the camera held steadily. The lighting of the subject was also important. Negatives should be exposed to suit the developer and developed to suit the enlarger. The enlarger lens should be of good quality and the lens and the condenser should be clean. The safe light should be tested to ensure that it is really safe. The correct grade of paper should be decided to suit the negative, test strips should be taken to determine the exposure and the developer should be fresh. The exposure of the paper should always be adjusted to enable the print to develop full time.

Competitions for the month resulted:
Landscape: A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, E. Kimble; 3, W.H. McClung.
Wattagan Outing: A GRADE; 1, W. McClung; 2, N. Ozolins; 3, (Equal) J. Wren and W. Frazer.
May Open: A GRADE: 1, M. McNaughton; 2, N. Ozolins; 3, W. McClung.
May Open: B GRADE: 1, Mrs. S. Tacon; 2, W. Frazer; 3, J. Rae.
Color: May Open: 1, N. Keats; 2, J. Cowan; 3, J. Vincent.

Point score progress:
A GRADE: N. Ozolins, 44; E. Kimble, 15; W. McClung, 15; W. Cremor, 13; N. Tacon, 13; K. Edwards, 9; J. Ralston, 8; J. Wren, 7.
B GRADE: J. Rae, 24; Mrs. S. Tacon, 22.5; W. Frazer, 16; N. Kidd, 9; W. Moxham, 6.5.
Color: R.N. Winn, 18; J. Cowan, 15; J. Vincent, 14; N. Keats, 11; J. Novak, 11; J. Ralston, 7; C. Parsons, 6; V. Pullen, 6; G.S. Smith, 6; A.W. Dumbrell, 5.



1st July 1954  Page 449 - Vol. 61 No. 7 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The Newcastle Photographic Society will conduct a learners class during August. The class, which will be under the supervision of leading members of the society, will embrace every phase of amateur photography from the use of the camera to the mounting of the enlargement. Sessions will be conducted weekly. The class will be open to non-members of the society. Those wishing to join should contact the President, Mr. Manuel, Tel. 81357, or the Secretary, Mr. Charker, Tel. B 2475.



1st August 1954  Page 462 - Vol. 61 No. 8 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Newcastle club members saw on July 5, the first screening of the city’s Royal Tour film. Nine movie photographers stationed at pre-arranged vantage points covered the Royal Visit to the city on Kodachrome film. The photographers were F. Barrie, J. Charker, R. Kidd, G. Garside, G. Edwards, K. Hilder, H. Williams, F. Lamb and E. Bell. The film, photographed under adverse weather conditions, records every feature of the Newcastle visit. Some of the most successful shots of the Royal couple at the City Hall were taken from the steeple of St. Andrews Church more than 100 yards away; the photographers used a six-inch lens. Sound will be added to the film which will become the city’s official record of the visit.

The club will commence its course in photography at the club rooms at Brunker Road, Adamstown on the night of Tuesday August 3, Classes will follow on the remaining four Tuesdays in August. The course will cover every phase of the use of the camera, developing, enlarging and print finishing. No charge will be made for class membership.

Competitions during the month resulted:
June Open: A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, W. McClung; 3, M. McNaughton.
B GRADE: 1, Mrs. S. Tacon; 2, N. Kidd; 3, E. Robertson.
Seascape: A GRADE: 1, N. Tacon; 2, N. Ozolins; 3, W. McClung.
Royal Tour: A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, W. Murphy; 3, J. Wren.
Color Section: Portrait: 1, V. Pullen; 2, C. Parsons; 3, J. Cowan.
Royal Tour: 1, G. Smith; 2, J. Vincent; 3, W. McClung.
July 5 Open: 1, W. McClung; 2, G. Edwards; 3, J. Novak.

Point Score Progress:
A GRADE: N. Ozolins, 58; W. McClung, 20; N. Tacon, 19; E. Kimble, 15; W. Cremor, 13; M. McNaughton, 12; J. Wren, 10; K. Edwards, 9; J. Ralston, 8; C. Collin, 6.
B GRADE: Mrs. S. Tacon, 28.5; J. Rae, 25; W. Frazer, 16; J. Kidd, 13; E. Robertson, 7; W. Moxham, 6.5.
Color Section: J. Cowan, 20; R. Winn, 20; J. Vincent, 18; J. Novak, 14; V. Pullen, 13; G. Smith, 12; N. Keates 11,; C. Parsons, 11; W. McClung, 10: A. Dumbrell, 8; J. Ralston, 8.



1st September 1954  Page 526 - Vol. 62 No. 9 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
The Newcastle Photographic Society and the recently formed Belmont Photographic Society had their first combined meeting at the Newcastle club rooms on July 26. The combined meeting followed an earlier outing on the northern shores of Lake Macquarie. Belmont members competed against Newcastle B GRADE members in the outing competition and gained the first three places. T. Noonan won the competition, V. Hotston was second and G. Derkenne third.

On 12th July, Mr. James Williams, a member of the Wallsend Hospital staff, addressed Newcastle Photographic Society members on X-ray photography. He showed X-ray negatives and some of the equipment used in the work.

Newcastle competitions during the month resulted:
Child Study: A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, W. Mc- Clung; 3, N. Tacon.
Child Study: B GRADE: 1, J. Rae; 2, J. Murphy; 3, Mrs. Tacon.
Harbour Outing: A GRADE : 1, N, Ozolins; 2, W. McClung; 3, E. Kimble.

July 26: Open: A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, N. Ozolins; 3, M. McNaughton.
July 26: Open: B GRADE: 1, Mrs. S. Tacon; 2, J. Williamson; 3, E. Robertson.
Belmont Outing: A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, E. Kimble; 3, N. Tacon.
Belmont Outing: B GRADE: 1, Mrs. S. Tacon; 2, N. Kidd; 3, E Robertson.
Color Division: Still Life: 1, J. Novak; 2, C. Parsons; 3, W. Dumbrell.
Wattangan Outing: 1, W. Dumbrell.
Animal: 1, J. Vincent; 2, J. Cowan; 3, R. Ryan.

August 2: Open: 1, R. Filson; 2, J. Cowan; 3, G. S. Smith.

Point Score leaders:
A GRADE: N. Ozolins 72; W. McClung 29; N. Tacon 23; E. Kimble 19; M. McNaughton 16; W. Cremor 13; C. Collin 11. J. Wren 11.
B GRADE: Mrs. S. Tacon 36.5; J. Rae 30; W. Frazer 16; N. Kidd 13; E. Robertson 11.
Color: J. Cowan 28; R. Winn 21; J. Vincent 21; J. Novak 20; W. Dumbrell 18; C. Parsons 15; G. S. Smith 15; V. Pullen 13; R. Keats 11; R. Filson 10, W. McClung 10.



Wednesday 29th September 1954
Page 12 - Barrier Miner (Broken Hill, NSW)
Page 7 - Barrier Daily Truth (Broken Hill, NSW)

CAMERA CLUB EXHIBITION
The annual exhibition of the Y.M.C.A. Camera Club was opened last night by the president (Mr. R. Barnes). The selection committee chose 90 prints from the folios received from the Leeton Camera Club, Wollongong Camera Club, Lismore Camera Club, Temora Camera Club and Broken Hill Camera Club and the Newcastle Photographic Society.

The prints were of a high standard and included work from some of the leading pictorialists of the eastern States. Among the outstanding prints were six by David Mascord, who specializes in nature study and whose ability and technique are obvious. His outstanding print was "Family Cares", which was a partially toned print of a bird feeding her young in the nest. "Toadstools" and "Malurus Cyaneus" (female Blue Wren) were also striking examples of this exhibitor's success in this field.

Messrs. Devine, Pye and Cooper, of the Temora Camera Club, demonstrated their command of the art. They submitted prints, four of which had been included in the Australia Photographic Review folios. "Wind Ripples" by R.S. Cooper, "Impact" by H.C. Devine and "Turning" by J. Pye in particular deserve mention.

OUTSTANDING
Two outstanding prints which attracted attention were by N. Ozolins. The quality and texture in the "Shadows on the Sands" were beautiful. "Candle Light" by Kaske, of Lismore, was a still life subject with warmth and quality.

R.H. Manuel, of the Newcastle Photographic Society, had selected several prints, two of which were excellent. Both were toned: "Pottery Pipes" in a modified sepia and "Blue Pool" a spectacular blue. A modern church steeple entitled "Aspirations" by W.H. McClung of the Newcastle Photographic Society, revealed subtle nuances of tone. This print was one of several submitted by this exhibitor.

"Winter Skies" by Mavis Hughes of the Leeton Camera Club, was a finely executed work with striking print quality.

The local prints were by no means disgraced by their company. The quality of R. Barnes four prints bears comparison with anything else in the show. His character study "Old Ebenezer" is a particularly fine piece of work. Fred Brook's "Waterlily", hand colored, shows that all the experts in this field are not necessarily commercial workers.

The exhibition will be continued tonight from 8pm to 10pm and is open to the public.



1st October 1954  Page 592 - Vol. 61 No. 10 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
With the elevation of leading B GRADE members next year, members of Newcastle Photographic Society expect to see a keen battle between husband and wife. The anticipated struggle will not be domestic but on the competition wall. The principals are Mr. N. Tacon, who is a close contestant for a place in the club’s A GRADE point score and Mrs. Tacon, who has a substantial lead in B GRADE. Mr. Tacon was elevated to A GRADE only this year. His wife is one of the club’s most recent competitors.

A GRADE Progress Points are: N. Ozolins, 86; W. McClung, 30; E. Kimble, 29; N. Tacon, 28; M. McNaughton, 18; W. Cremor, 18; C. Collin, 13; J. Wren, 11.
B GRADE Point Score: Mrs. S. Tacon, 46.5; J. Rae, 35; N. Kidd, 17; W. Frazer, 16; E. Robertson 15.
Color section: R. Winn and J. Cowan are leading with 36 points. Other progress figures are: A.W. Dumbrell, 25; J. Vincent, 25; J. Novak, 24; W. McClung, 16; C. Parsons, 16; G.S. Smith, 16; V. Pullen, 14; N. Keats, 11; J. Ralston, 10.

Competitions during the month resulted:
Still Life or Table Top: A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, C. Hirst; 3, E. Kimble.
Still Life or Table Top: B GRADE: 1, S. Andringer; 2, Mrs. S. Tacon; 3, J. Williams.

August 23:
Open: A GRADE: 1, W. Cremor; 2, N. Ozolins; 3, E. Kimble.
Open: B GRADE: 1, J. Rae; 2, B. Youll; 3, S. Andringer.
Colour Section:
Harbour Outing: 1, J. Kidd; 2, R. Winn; 3, N. Ozolins.
Pattern, Texture or Design: 1, R. Winn; 2, A. Dumbrell; 3, N. Ozolins.

August 16:
Open: 1, R. Winn; 2, J. Cowan; 3, N. Ozolins.

September 6:
Open: 1, W. McClung; 2, J. Cowan; 3, J. Novak.



1st November 1954  Page 652 - Vol. 61 No. 11 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
Stereo equipment permitted the accurate contour mapping of landscapes photographed from 25,000 feet, Mr. Jim Harris, a former aerial photographer, told members of Newcastle Photographic Society on September 27. Mr. Harris said that from 25,000 feet a single photograph covered approximately 30 square miles. Photographs on a single “run” were taken with a 60-degree overlap, which permitted the viewing of pairs of photographs with stereo equipment. The photographer in the ’plane had to decide his exposure but the operation of the camera was electrically controlled. The navigator had to hold his ’plane on course and keep it level throughout the “run”.

On September 13, Mr. Tom Jackson, a Newcastle commercial photographer, emphasized the need for a good negative in the production of first-class work. Too many photographers, he said, were inclined to think too much in terms of the print and not pay sufficient attention to their negative quality. Mr. Jackson offered trophies for a competition for a 8 x 10 glossy print together with the negative. Subject of the competition will be the new wing of the Newcastle Hospital. Mr. Jackson will judge the competition on November 22.

On September 20, club member Fred Barrie entertained members of the Cine and Color Division with a Kodachrome film of his recent trip to Brampton Island, in the Barrier Reef.

Competitions for the month resulted :
MORNA POINT OUTING: A GRADE: 1, W. McClung; 2, N. Ozolins; 3, N. Tacon.
MORNA POINT OUTING: B GRADE: 1, Mrs. S. Tacon.


OUTDOORS AT NIGHT: A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, W. McClung; 3, M. McNaughton.
OUTDOORS AT NIGHT: B GRADE: 1, N. Kidd; 2, Mrs. S. Tacon.

September 27:
OPEN: A GRADE: 1, C. Collin; 2, N. Ozolins; 3, E. Kimble.
OPEN: B GRADE: 1, G. Hughes; 2 (Equal), J. Rae and S. Andringer.

COLOR SECTION: SHIPPING OR INDUSTRY: 1, C. Collin; 2, J. Cowan; 3, N. Ozolins.
SPORT: 1, V. Pullen; 2, J. Cowan; 3, A. Dumbrell.

September 20: OPEN: 1, J. Vincent; 2, A. Dumbrell; 3, J. Novak.

October 4: OPEN: 1, J. Vincent; 2, J. Cowan; 3, A. Dumbrell.

Point Score Progress :
A GRADE: N. Ozolins 99, W. McClung 40, E. Kimble 33, N. Tacon 31, M. McNaughton 22, W. Cremor 19, C. Collin 18, J. Wren 11.
B GRADE: Mrs. S. Tacon 55.5, J. Rae 38.5, N. Kidd 22, W. Frazer 16, E. Robertson 15.
COLOR: J. Cowan 49, R. Winn 40, J. Vincent 37, A. Dumbrell 36, J. Novak 29, V. Pullen 19, C. Parsons 17, G. S. Smith 17, W. McClung 16, N. Ozolins 13, N. Keats 11, J. Ralston 10.



1st December 1954  Page 717 - Vol. 61 No. 12 Australasian Photo-Review

NEWCASTLE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY
An unusually large number of competitions conducted during the year in black-and-white and color sections is expected to stimulate an outstanding showing of prints and slides at the Newcastle Photographic Society Christmas meeting. The society has concentrated on competitive work during the year and has held up to eight competitions in a month. Each competition is followed by a print criticism by a leading worker and a discussion by club members. Competitions during the past month resulted:
ANIMAL STUDY: A GRADE: 1, W. Cremor; 2, W. McClung; 3, M. McNaughton.
ANIMAL STUDY: B GRADE: 1, B. Youll; 2 (Equal), E. Robertson and J. Rae.
UNORTHODOX SHOT: A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, N. Tacon.
UNORTHODOX SHOT: B GRADE: 1, Mrs. S. Tacon.

October 25:v OPEN: A GRADE: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, W. Cremor; 3 (Equal), M. McNaughton and W. McClung.
OPEN: B GRADE: 1, S. Andringer; 2, B. Youll; 3, J. Rae.
October 18:
COLOR SECTION: OPEN: 1, J. Cowan; 2, J. Novak; 3, R. Winn.
MORNA POINT OUTING: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, A. Dumbrell; 3, R. Winn.
BELMONT OUTING: 1, N. Ozolins; 2, R. Winn.v UNORTHODOX SHOT: 1, J. Cowan; 2, J. Vincent; 3, N. Ozolins.
TREE STUDY: 1, J. Vincent; 2, J. Cowan; 3, R. Winn.

Point Score Progress:
A GRADE: N. Ozolins 110, W. McClung 46.5, N. Tacon 36, E. Kimble 35, W. Cremor 28, M. McNaughton 26.5, C. Collin 19, J. Wren 11.
B GRADE: Mrs. S. Tacon 60, J. Rae 45, N. Kidd 23, E. Robertson 18.5, W. Frazer 16, B. Youll 13.
COLOR: J. Cowan 63, R. Winn 54, J. Vincent 47, A. Dumbrell 42, J. Novak 33, N. Ozolins 28, V. Pullen 20, C. Parsons 18, G. S. Smith 17, W. McClung 16, N. Keats 11, J. Ralston 10.



4th January 2013  Newcastle Herald (NSW)

When Reta Telford joined the Newcastle Photographic Society in 1972 she was full of curiosity, armed with a new Canon SLR that took black and white prints she had to develop in a darkroom. Now aged 86, she hasn’t stopped learning since, recently buying her first digital camera and learning the basics of Photoshop. "I love photography, it makes you look around, you go for a drive and you look at the street a different way", she said. "It keeps me alive, otherwise I’d be sitting down in a rocking chair". The Newcastle Photographic Society celebrated its 75th anniversary in November 2012. Mrs Telford had owned an Instamatic and Box Brownie when she bought her first Canon and asked the seller where she could learn more about it. "They said to join the photographic society or go to tech – I did both". She joined in 1972, when the society had its own purpose built clubhouse in Popram Road, Adamstown. It had held since 1938, in conjunction with the Newcastle Show, the Newcastle International Exhibition of Photography, but this is now a national competition. Enthusiasts of all ages – who have included Gary Weber, Stuart Thompson and Alex Hunter – gathered for outings to capture new images, listen to photographers speak about their craft, learn more about techniques and hold competitions among themselves. Over time Mrs Telford became known for her portraits and landscapes, some of which she used to color using oil paints. She was elected President of the society from 1997 to 2009 and is now Vice-President. The club has seen the decline in the popularity of slides and the introduction of different kinds of paper, color photography, digital photography and editing software including Photoshop. "I don’t like color, I like to work in the darkroom", she said. "When you are developing black and white prints you can have the safe light on and watch the print come out of the developer. I bought a digital camera but I’ve still got all my old ones, I like using the film, it just feels like it would last longer".

RETA TELFORD

© PHOTOGRAPHIC EXHIBITIONS OF AUSTRALIA